英语人教版必修1单元测评 Word版含解析（打包共6套）

模块综合测评
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
W:I
hear
you
have
changed
your
job.How
do
you
feel
about
your
new
job?
M:Better
than
the
job
I
used
to
have.The
most
important
thing
is
that
doing
the
present
job,I
can
use
what
I
learned
from
the
old
job.
1.Why
does
the
man
like
his
new
job
more?
A.He
can
use
what
he
learned.
B.He
can
learn
a
lot
from
the
new
job.
C.He
has
more
free
time.
W:Could
you
have
my
dress
delivered?
M:Of
course,madam.May
I
have
your
address,please?
W:7345
King
Street.
2.What
does
the
woman
want
the
man
to
do?
A.To
buy
her
a
dress.
B.To
give
her
his
address.
C.To
deliver
her
dress.
M:Sue,that
report
on
my
desk
has
to
be
finished
today.But
I’m
sick
and
can’t
come
to
the
office.
W:I
see
the
report,Bill.I’ll
finish
it
for
you.
3.Where
is
Sue
now?
A.At
home.
B.At
Bill’s
home.
C.At
the
office.
M:Mary,you
didn’t
do
well
in
today’s
maths
test.What
was
the
matter?
W:I
was
in
a
hurry,and
I
didn’t
check
my
answers.
M:That’s
too
bad
you
didn’t
think
of
it
before.
W:Sorry,Mr
Smith.If
only
I
had
been
more
careful!
4.What
does
the
woman
think
of
herself?
A.Careless.　　　
B.Unfortunate.　
C.Hopeless.
W:Sorry,Mr
Johnson.I
forgot
to
bring
my
homework.
M:Did
you
do
it?
W:Yes,but
I
left
in
a
hurry
this
morning.
M:Do
remember
to
bring
it
here
tomorrow.
5.What
is
the
possible
relationship
between
the
two
speakers?
A.A
boss
and
an
employee.
B.A
teacher
and
a
student.
C.A
father
and
a
son.
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6至8题。
W:Good
morning,Ken!
Why
are
you
so
early
today?
M:Morning,Julia!Well,I
was
doing
my
homework,and
I
have
finished
it
now.You
see,the
maths
homework
is
difficult
for
me.
W:Is
it?I’m
afraid
you
stayed
up
again
last
night
for
the
football
match.
M:Yes.That’s
why
I
am
doing
my
homework
here
in
the
classroom.If
my
mother
had
seen
I
was
doing
my
homework
at
home,she
would
have
known
everything.
W:Your
mother
is
really
strict
with
you.
M:Strict?I
think
she
is
hard
on
me.
W:Then
how
did
you
watch
the
football
match
last
night?
M:I
bought
a
second-hand
small
TV
set
with
my
pocket
money.And
I
put
it
in
my
bedroom.
W:Didn’t
your
mother
hear
you?
M:No,she
was
too
tired
after
the
whole
day’s
work.
W:Did
your
favorite
team
win
last
night?
M:Sure!
6.Why
is
Ken
so
early
this
morning?
A.He
is
on
duty.
B.He
has
to
do
his
homework.
C.He
often
does
this.
7.What
do
we
learn
about
Ken’s
mother?
A.She
is
very
strict
with
Ken.
B.She
is
very
friendly.
C.She
always
makes
Ken
do
a
lot
of
homework.
8.Did
Ken’s
favorite
team
win
last
night?
A.Yes,it
did.
B.No,it
didn’t.
C.We
don’t
know.
听第7段材料,回答第9至11题。
M:So,two
men
grabbed
your
bag
as
you
came
out
of
the
bank
and
ran
off
down
the
street.Is
that
correct?
W:Yes.One
of
them
stopped
me
and
asked
me
the
time.The
other
one
grabbed
my
bag.
M:Would
you
please
describe
them?
W:I’m
not
sure.Because
it
happened
so
quickly.
M:The
one
who
asked
you
the
time,what
did
he
look
like?
W:Well,let
me
see.He
was
short
and
he
had
brown
hair
and
a
little
moustache.He
was
very
thin,about
20
years
old.And
he
was
wearing
a
black
jacket.
M:Did
you
notice
the
colour
of
his
eyes?
W:Yes.They
were
brown.
M:Good.And
what
about
the
other
man?
W:I’m
sorry,I
didn’t
get
a
good
look
at
him.He
was
quite
tall.I
remember
he
had
a
beard.He
was
bald
and
he
appeared
much
older
than
the
short
one.
M:Thank
you.We
may
call
you
tomorrow.
W:OK.
9.Where
does
the
conversation
probably
happen?
A.At
the
doctor’s
office.
B.At
the
police
station.
C.In
the
street.
10.What
was
the
man
who
asked
the
time
like?
A.He
was
tall
and
thin.
B.He
was
tall
and
fat.
C.He
was
short
and
thin.
11.How
many
people
robbed
the
woman?
A.Two.
B.Three.
C.We
don’t
know.
听第8段材料,回答第12至13题。
M:Have
you
seen
Elizabeth
lately?
W:Yes,I
have.I
saw
her
a
couple
of
weeks
ago.She
hasn’t
been
very
well
in
the
last
couple
of
weeks.
M:Has
she
seen
a
doctor
since
she’s
been
ill?
W:Yes,she
has.The
doctor
told
her
to
take
it
easy
for
a
while,but
she
hasn’t
been
following
his
advice.She’s
as
busy
as
usual.
M:Do
you
think
it
useful
for
me
to
ask
her
to
have
a
rest
while
I
go
to
see
her?Or
shall
we
go
together?
W:I
think
you
can
go
yourself
and
show
your
concern
to
her
since
she
sometimes
would
take
your
advice.So
it’s
unnecessary
for
me
to
go
with
you.What’s
more,I’ve
got
my
hands
full
tomorrow.
12.What
do
we
know
about
Elizabeth?
A.She’s
too
busy
to
see
a
doctor.
B.The
doctor’s
advice
does
her
no
good.
C.She
hasn’t
got
well
though
she’s
seen
a
doctor.
13.Who
will
see
Elizabeth?
A.The
man.
B.The
woman.
C.Neither
of
them.
听第9段材料,回答第14至17题。
W:Now,let
me
show
you
around
our
school.This
is
our
computer
lab.
M:Wow!
So
many
computers!
How
many
computers
do
you
have?
W:We
have
80
in
this
lab
and
we
have
another
40
in
another
lab.Besides
all
these,we
have
one
for
each
teacher.
M:Then,how
many
teachers
do
you
have?
W:88.The
teachers
are
using
the
computers
as
aids
in
their
classes.
M:Really?Can
we
go
into
the
classes
to
have
a
look?
W:Yes.This
is
an
English
class.The
teacher
is
explaining
new
words
with
the
help
of
the
computer.
M:How
nice!
It
is
easier
to
explain
the
words
with
the
help
of
the
computer.
W:And
it
saves
a
lot
of
time.
14.Where
does
this
talk
take
place?
A.In
a
school.
B.In
a
hotel.
C.In
an
office.
15.How
many
computers
do
they
have
altogether?
A.80.　　　　B.168.　　　　　C.208.
16.What
is
the
use
of
the
computer
in
class?
A.It
is
used
to
help
teachers
teach.
B.It
is
used
to
learn
new
words.
C.It
is
used
to
save
time.
17.Why
do
they
use
the
computer
in
class?
A.They
use
it
to
make
the
work
easier
and
save
a
lot
of
time.
B.They
have
to.
C.They
like
to
use
it.
听第10段材料,回答第18至20题。
Good
morning,everybody.My
topic
for
today
is
“Early
Money”.I’m
going
to
tell
you
something
about
money
used
in
the
early
days.To
be
honest,we
know
little
about
how
early
people
came
to
use
money,but
we
do
know
some
things
which
have
been
used
as
money.In
early
times,in
some
European
countries,salt
was
used
as
money.In
some
parts
of
Asia,tea
was
used
for
money.The
American
Indians
used
nuts
and
other
things.Perhaps
the
most
common
money
of
all
were
animals
of
some
kind.In
some
places
today,cows
are
still
used
as
a
kind
of
money.So
you
see,things
highly
valued
by
everybody
may
serve
as
money.
The
Chinese
were
the
first
people
to
use
coins
as
money.Oh,sorry,you
don’t
know
the
word?Well,it
is
spelled
C-O-I-N.Here
are
some
coins
of
the
past.You
can
come
over
and
have
a
look.
18.What
did
the
speaker
want
to
tell
the
listeners
about?
A.The
kinds
of
things
which
will
serve
as
money
in
the
future.
B.The
money
used
in
the
early
days.
C.The
fact
that
the
Chinese
people
were
the
earliest
users
of
money.
19.According
to
the
speech,which
of
the
following
might
have
been
used
for
money
by
early
Japanese?
A.Tea.
B.Salt.
C.Nuts.
20.What
was
the
common
character
of
the
things
used
for
money?
A.They
were
difficult
to
get.
B.They
had
some
practical
use.
C.They
were
considered
valuable
by
all
people.
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
In
America,when
the
eighth
graders
leave
the
middle
school,they
are
often
worried
about
moving
to
the
high
school.It
is
a
hard
time
for
them,but
it
can
be
an
exciting
one
as
well.To
make
it
easier,students
need
to
get
familiar
with
their
school.
Even
though
they’ve
done
this
already
in
the
middle
school,it’s
still
important
to
find
where
their
classrooms
are.Most
schools
take
students
to
the
high
school
for
a
visit
at
the
end
of
their
eighth
grade
year.And,most
schools
also
have
a
freshman
(新生)speech
for
parents
and
students
before
the
first
year
begins.Sometimes
the
main
office
will
give
away
a
map
of
the
school.This
can
help
students
and
parents
to
find
different
places
in
the
school.
One
way
to
know
your
high
school
more
and
make
new
friends
is
to
join
a
club
or
play
a
sport.Schools
often
offer
chances
to
join
different
clubs
and
sports.Fall
activities
begin
in
August
before
the
first
day
of
school.If
you
are
not
interested
in
sports,there
are
clubs
for
any
interest,such
as
drama,dance,chess,photography,community
service,etc.These
clubs
allow
students
from
different
grades.By
joining
an
activity,students
can
find
new
friendships,not
to
mention
improving
their
chances
in
future
college
applications(申请).The
school
office
will
have
a
list
of
activities
offered
at
the
school
and
information
on
how
to
join
them.
What’s
more,to
have
a
great
start
to
a
high
school
year,students
can
write
down
some
of
their
worries,and
ask
for
help
from
teachers
and
school
workers.
21.According
to
the
text,most
students
feel
　　　when
entering
the
high
school.?
A.unhappy
B.nervous
C.lonely
D.disappointed
22.What
can
be
learned
about
the
school
clubs?
A.There
are
fewer
students
from
higher
grades
in
the
school
clubs.
B.The
school
clubs
in
high
school
mainly
welcome
sports
fans.
C.The
school
office
can
help
new
students
join
school
clubs.
D.Summer
activities
begin
before
school
starts.
23.When
do
many
schools
take
students
to
visit
their
new
high
school?
A.Before
the
eighth
grade
year
starts.
B.Right
after
the
high
school
year
starts.
C.At
the
beginning
of
the
new
term
in
the
high
school.
D.By
the
end
of
the
last
year
in
the
middle
school.
24.What
is
the
purpose
of
this
text?
A.To
describe
high
school
life.
B.To
give
advice
to
new
high
school
students.
C.To
teach
useful
experience.
D.To
introduce
new
schools.
B
A
Russian,a
Cuban(古巴人),an
American
businessman
and
an
American
lawyer
were
on
a
train
travelling
across
England.The
Russian
took
out
a
large
bottle
of
vodka(伏特加酒),gave
each
of
the
men
a
drink
and
then
threw
the
rest
half
bottle
of
vodka
out
of
the
window.
“Why
did
you
do
that?”
asked
the
American
businessman.
“There’s
too
much
vodka
in
my
country,”
said
the
Russian.“And
we
really
have
more
than
we
will
ever
use.”
A
little
later,the
Cuban
passed
around
fine
Havana
Cigars(雪茄烟).Then
he
threw
the
rest
out
of
the
window.
“I
thought
Cuba
is
not
a
rich
country,”the
businessman
said.“But
you
threw
that
very
good
cigars
out
of
the
window!”
“Cigars,”
the
Cuban
answered,“are
the
cheapest
in
my
country.We
have
more
of
them
than
we
know
what
to
do
with.”
The
American
businessman
sat
quietly
for
a
moment.Then
he
got
up,caught
the
lawyer
by
the
arm
and
threw
him
out
of
the
window.
25.The
Russian
and
the
Cuban
both
wanted
to
　　　.?
A.tell
the
businessman
that
their
countries
are
rich
B.prove
that
they
were
rich
C.ask
the
two
Americans
to
visit
their
countries
D.make
the
businessman
happy
26.When
the
businessman
said
“I
thought
Cuba
is
not
a
rich
country”,he
meant
“　　　”?
A.Russia
is
richer
than
Cuba.
B.America
is
richer
than
Cuba
and
Russia.
C.You
shouldn’t
throw
those
very
good
cigars
away.
D.Do
you
have
more
cigars
than
me?
27.What
did
the
businessman
want
to
say
by
throwing
the
lawyer
out
of
the
window?
A.I
want
to
buy
some
vodka.
B.We
have
too
many
lawyers
in
my
country.
C.I’ll
go
to
Cuba
and
do
some
business
of
cigars.
D.If
you
need
lawyers,come
to
America.
28.Which
do
you
think
is
the
best
title
for
the
passage?
A.Travelling
across
England
B.Four
Rich
Men
C.You’re
Wasting
Too
Much
D.There’s
Too
Much
C
The
first
time
I
went
for
a
walk
around
my
father-in-law’s
neighbourhood
in
America
was
Garbage
Day,and
I
was
shocked
to
see
what
people
were
throwing
out.
It
was
back
in
1981,and
I
saw
many
people
gather
in
someone’s
front
yard.As
I
went
nearer
to
see
what
was
happening,I
got
my
first
introduction
to
yard
sales.For
the
few
dollars
I
had
in
my
wallet,I
was
able
to
buy
a
seven-inch
black-and-white
portable
TV.I
also
bought
a
flashlight.
The
following
weekend,at
another
yard
sale,I
saw
a
14-inch
colour
TV
being
sold
for
almost
nothing.I
felt
I
could
not
miss
the
offer
and
bought
it.Now
I
had
two
sets
and
couldn’t
wait
to
see
what
else
I
could
afford
the
next
weekend.
Spring
ended,and
by
then
I
had
accumulated
almost
every
type
of
electronic
equipment
I
had
always
wished
to
have
back
home.
Then
this
new
idea
came
to
mind.I
had
heard
about
a
man
who
travelled
back
home
every
few
months.He
drove
a
truck
filled
with
boxes
of
new
and
used
stuff
that
people
were
sending
to
relatives.So
I
told
my
father
that
I
would
send
as
many
types
of
items
as
I
could
so
that
he
could
start
his
resale
business.
Every
few
months
I
would
gather
several
boxes
of
American
“junk”
televisions,toasters,fans,hair
dryers,etc.and
sent
them
home.As
word
got
out
about
my
father’s
“trash”
market,people
all
came
to
buy
these
things.
Three
years
later,when
I
visited
my
family
for
the
first
time
since
leaving
home,I
learned
that
many
of
the
families
in
our
neighborhood
had
a
piece
of
“trash”.It
proved
that
I
had
the
responsibility
to
keep
people
back
home
in
Guatemala
up
to
date
with
the
latest
technology
you
no
longer
need.
29.According
to
the
text,a
yard
sale
is
a
place
where
people
　　　.?
A.sell
their
front
yards
at
a
low
price
B.sell
unwanted
things
in
their
own
yards
C.gather
in
someone’s
yard
to
enjoy
things
D.throw
away
their
trash
in
someone’s
yard
30.The
author
felt
he
could
not
miss
the
offer
because
　　　.?
A.the
second
TV
set
was
bigger
B.the
second
TV
set
was
a
colour
TV
C.the
second
TV
set
was
very
cheap
D.he
wanted
two
TV
sets
very
much
31.What
did
the
author
think
of
the
“junk”
he
bought?
A.He
thought
they
were
valuable.
B.He
thought
they
were
not
worth
buying.
C.He
was
not
surprised
to
see
them
thrown
away.
D.He
thought
he
could
sell
them
for
a
good
price.
32.From
the
passage
we
can
infer
that
　　　.?
A.the
author
comes
from
a
poor
place
B.the
author
often
goes
home
to
sell
the
“junk”
C.the
author
buys
the
“junk”
only
to
make
profits
D.the
“junk”
is
not
welcomed
in
the
author’s
hometown
D
33.Sydney
Tower
is
　　　in
Sydney,Australia.?
A.the
busiest
street
B.the
biggest
station
C.the
most
beautiful
park
D.the
highest
point
34.If
you
want
to
book
a
ticket
to
Sydney
Tower,you
can’t
　　　.?
A.email
sydneytower@
hotmail.com
B.fax
02
9333
9203
C.search
www.sydneytower.com.au
D.dial
02
9333
9222
35.Frank
wants
to
go
to
Sydney
Tower
with
his
two
children,so
he
will
pay
　　　.?
A.$60　　　　　　　　　B.$90
C.$120
D.$150
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
Taking
good
notes
is
a
time-saving
skill
that
will
help
you
to
become
a
better
student
in
several
ways.　36　Second,your
notes
are
excellent
materials
to
refer
to
when
you
are
studying
for
a
test.Third,note-taking
offers
variety
to
your
study
time
and
helps
you
to
hold
your
interest.?
You
will
want
to
take
notes
during
classroom
discussions
and
while
reading
a
textbook
or
doing
research
for
a
report.　37　
Whenever
or
however
you
take
notes,keep
in
mind
that
note-taking
is
a
selective
process.　38　?
The
following
methods
may
work
best
for
you.
●Read
the
text
quickly
to
find
the
main
facts
and
ideas
in
it.
●Carefully
read
the
text
and
watch
for
words
that
can
show
main
points
and
supporting
facts.
●Write
your
notes
in
your
own
words.
●　39　?
●Note
any
questions
or
ideas
you
may
have
about
what
was
said
or
written.
As
you
take
notes,you
may
want
to
use
your
own
shorthand(速记).When
you
do,be
sure
that
you
understand
your
symbols
and
that
you
use
them
all
the
time.　40　?
A.Use
words,not
complete
sentences.
B.There
are
three
practical
note-taking
methods.
C.You
must
write
your
notes
on
separate
paper.
D.Otherwise,you
may
not
be
able
to
read
your
notes
later.
E.You
will
also
want
to
develop
your
own
method
for
taking
notes.
F.That
means
you
must
first
decide
what
is
important
enough
to
include
in
your
notes.
G.First,the
simple
act
of
writing
something
down
makes
it
easier
for
you
to
understand
and
remember
it.
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
Can
it
really
be
sixty-two
years
ago
that
I
first
saw
you?As
I
look
into
your
eyes
now,it
　41　
like
only
yesterday
that
I
first
saw
you,in
that
small
cafe
in
Hanover
Square.?
From
the
　42　
I
saw
you
smile,as
you
opened
the
door
for
that
young
mother
and
her
newborn
baby,I
knew
that
I
wanted
to
　43　
the
rest
of
my
life
with
you.?
I
cannot
tell
you
how
　44　
my
love
for
you
was
back
then,when
I
returned
to
you
on
leave
in
the
September.We
　45　
each
other
so
tight(紧地)
that
I
thought
we
would
burst.I
　46　
you
to
marry
me
the
very
same
day
and
I
cheered
with
　47　
when
you
looked
deep
into
my
eyes
and
said
“yes”
to
being
my
wife.?
I
　48　
being
so
enjoyed,when
a
year
later,you
　49　
held
my
hand
to
your
waist(腰)
and
said
in
my
　50　
that
we
were
going
to
be
a
family.I
know
both
our
　51　
love
you
dearly;they
are
outside
the
door
now,　52　.?
Do
you
remember
how
I
looked
like
a
mad
man
when
Jonathan
was
　53　?I
can
still
picture
you
　54　
at
me
now,as
I
held
him
for
the
very
first
time
in
my
arms.I
watched
as
your
laughter
died
away
into
　55　
and
I
looked
at
him
and
cried
my
own
tears
of
joy,too.?
I
know
you
are
　56　,my
dear,and
I
must
let
you
　57　.But
I
love
you
so
much
and
it
　58　
to
do
so.I
must
go
now,my
darling.Our
children
are
waiting
outside.They
want
to
say
　59　
to
you.?
I
am
sad
that
you
had
to
leave
me,but
please
don’t
　60　.I
will
be
with
you
soon.?
41.A.sounds
B.seems
C.looks
D.tastes
42.A.moment
B.place
C.restaurant
D.year
43.A.save
B.win
C.share
D.waste
44.A.high
B.weak
C.strong
D.thick
45.A.took
B.held
C.made
D.put
46.A.asked
B.thought
C.guessed
D.ordered
47.A.joy
B.interest
C.surprise
D.anger
48.A.finish
B.hate
C.forget
D.remember
49.A.suddenly
B.hard
C.gently
D.carelessly
50.A.head
B.hand
C.ear
D.mouth
51.A.parents
B.children
C.doctors
D.neighbours
52.A.singing
B.playing
C.resting
D.waiting
53.A.born
B.young
C.pleased
D.wrong
54.A.crying
B.shouting
C.laughing
D.listening
55.A.tears
B.sleep
C.death
D.excitement
56.A.great
B.tired
C.late
D.worried
57.A.drive
B.run
C.jump
D.go
58.A.ends
B.starts
C.hurts
D.smiles
59.A.goodbye
B.hello
C.news
D.stories
60.A.wait
B.worry
C.wake
D.miss
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
I’m
Jan
Hasek,61.　　　　　　
old
miner
from
the
Czech
Republic.In
April
1945
I
62.　　　　　　
(hear)something
explode
at
midnight.I
got
up
and
63.　　　　　　
(run)outside.The
sound
came
from
a
mine
64.
hadn’t
been
used
for
a
long
time.Suddenly
I
saw
some
German
soldiers
65.　　　　　　the
light
of
the
moon.They
66.(take)
wooden
boxes
from
trucks
and
putting
them
in
the
mine.?
A
week
later
I
decided
67.　　　　　　　　
(go)
and
see
for
myself.To
my
surprise
the
entrance
68.　　　　　　
the
mine
was
closed.Some
people
say
that
the
Amber
Room
and
some
gold
69.　　　　　　　　　
(bury)
in
the
mine.I
think
it
might
be
so,as
the
Amber
Room
has
never
70.(find).?
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
This
morning
on
my
way
to
school
I
was
deep
moved
by
what
I
saw
outside
a
bank.An
old
man
was
counting
his
money
in
the
front
of
the
bank.Suddenly
a
young
man
came
running
and
knocked
him
down.To
make
things
bad,his
money
was
lying
in
all
direction.In
no
time
the
people
around
rush
to
pick
the
money
up
while
the
old
man
stood
there,not
know
what
to
do.Surprisingly,everyone
gave
back
the
money
they
had
just
picked.The
old
man
counted
the
money
again
and
found
that
not
a
single
bill
was
missed.To
my
great
joy,there
are
now
a
lot
of
nice
people
in
your
life.It’s
true
what
honesty
is
more
important
than
money!
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
假定你是李华,正在一所英国学校学习暑期课程,遇到一些困难,希望得到学校辅导中心(Learning
Center)的帮助。根据学校规定,你需书面预约,请按下列要点写一封信:
1.本人简介;
2.求助内容;
3.约定时间;
4.你的联系方式(Email
address:lihua@126.com;Phone
number:12345678)。
注意:1.词数100左右;2.可以适当增加细节,以使行文连贯;3.开头和结束语已为你写好。
Dear
Sir/Madam,
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Looking
forward
to
your
reply.
Yours,
Li
Hua
模块综合测评
答案
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
W:I
hear
you
have
changed
your
job.How
do
you
feel
about
your
new
job?
M:Better
than
the
job
I
used
to
have.The
most
important
thing
is
that
doing
the
present
job,I
can
use
what
I
learned
from
the
old
job.
1.Why
does
the
man
like
his
new
job
more?
A.He
can
use
what
he
learned.
B.He
can
learn
a
lot
from
the
new
job.
C.He
has
more
free
time.
答案:A
W:Could
you
have
my
dress
delivered?
M:Of
course,madam.May
I
have
your
address,please?
W:7345
King
Street.
2.What
does
the
woman
want
the
man
to
do?
A.To
buy
her
a
dress.
B.To
give
her
his
address.
C.To
deliver
her
dress.
答案:C
M:Sue,that
report
on
my
desk
has
to
be
finished
today.But
I’m
sick
and
can’t
come
to
the
office.
W:I
see
the
report,Bill.I’ll
finish
it
for
you.
3.Where
is
Sue
now?
A.At
home.
B.At
Bill’s
home.
C.At
the
office.
答案:C
M:Mary,you
didn’t
do
well
in
today’s
maths
test.What
was
the
matter?
W:I
was
in
a
hurry,and
I
didn’t
check
my
answers.
M:That’s
too
bad
you
didn’t
think
of
it
before.
W:Sorry,Mr
Smith.If
only
I
had
been
more
careful!
4.What
does
the
woman
think
of
herself?
A.Careless.　　　
B.Unfortunate.　
C.Hopeless.
答案:A
W:Sorry,Mr
Johnson.I
forgot
to
bring
my
homework.
M:Did
you
do
it?
W:Yes,but
I
left
in
a
hurry
this
morning.
M:Do
remember
to
bring
it
here
tomorrow.
5.What
is
the
possible
relationship
between
the
two
speakers?
A.A
boss
and
an
employee.
B.A
teacher
and
a
student.
C.A
father
and
a
son.
答案:B
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6至8题。
W:Good
morning,Ken!
Why
are
you
so
early
today?
M:Morning,Julia!Well,I
was
doing
my
homework,and
I
have
finished
it
now.You
see,the
maths
homework
is
difficult
for
me.
W:Is
it?I’m
afraid
you
stayed
up
again
last
night
for
the
football
match.
M:Yes.That’s
why
I
am
doing
my
homework
here
in
the
classroom.If
my
mother
had
seen
I
was
doing
my
homework
at
home,she
would
have
known
everything.
W:Your
mother
is
really
strict
with
you.
M:Strict?I
think
she
is
hard
on
me.
W:Then
how
did
you
watch
the
football
match
last
night?
M:I
bought
a
second-hand
small
TV
set
with
my
pocket
money.And
I
put
it
in
my
bedroom.
W:Didn’t
your
mother
hear
you?
M:No,she
was
too
tired
after
the
whole
day’s
work.
W:Did
your
favorite
team
win
last
night?
M:Sure!
6.Why
is
Ken
so
early
this
morning?
A.He
is
on
duty.
B.He
has
to
do
his
homework.
C.He
often
does
this.
答案:B
7.What
do
we
learn
about
Ken’s
mother?
A.She
is
very
strict
with
Ken.
B.She
is
very
friendly.
C.She
always
makes
Ken
do
a
lot
of
homework.
答案:A
8.Did
Ken’s
favorite
team
win
last
night?
A.Yes,it
did.
B.No,it
didn’t.
C.We
don’t
know.
答案:A
听第7段材料,回答第9至11题。
M:So,two
men
grabbed
your
bag
as
you
came
out
of
the
bank
and
ran
off
down
the
street.Is
that
correct?
W:Yes.One
of
them
stopped
me
and
asked
me
the
time.The
other
one
grabbed
my
bag.
M:Would
you
please
describe
them?
W:I’m
not
sure.Because
it
happened
so
quickly.
M:The
one
who
asked
you
the
time,what
did
he
look
like?
W:Well,let
me
see.He
was
short
and
he
had
brown
hair
and
a
little
moustache.He
was
very
thin,about
20
years
old.And
he
was
wearing
a
black
jacket.
M:Did
you
notice
the
colour
of
his
eyes?
W:Yes.They
were
brown.
M:Good.And
what
about
the
other
man?
W:I’m
sorry,I
didn’t
get
a
good
look
at
him.He
was
quite
tall.I
remember
he
had
a
beard.He
was
bald
and
he
appeared
much
older
than
the
short
one.
M:Thank
you.We
may
call
you
tomorrow.
W:OK.
9.Where
does
the
conversation
probably
happen?
A.At
the
doctor’s
office.
B.At
the
police
station.
C.In
the
street.
答案:B
10.What
was
the
man
who
asked
the
time
like?
A.He
was
tall
and
thin.
B.He
was
tall
and
fat.
C.He
was
short
and
thin.
答案:C
11.How
many
people
robbed
the
woman?
A.Two.
B.Three.
C.We
don’t
know.
答案:A
听第8段材料,回答第12至13题。
M:Have
you
seen
Elizabeth
lately?
W:Yes,I
have.I
saw
her
a
couple
of
weeks
ago.She
hasn’t
been
very
well
in
the
last
couple
of
weeks.
M:Has
she
seen
a
doctor
since
she’s
been
ill?
W:Yes,she
has.The
doctor
told
her
to
take
it
easy
for
a
while,but
she
hasn’t
been
following
his
advice.She’s
as
busy
as
usual.
M:Do
you
think
it
useful
for
me
to
ask
her
to
have
a
rest
while
I
go
to
see
her?Or
shall
we
go
together?
W:I
think
you
can
go
yourself
and
show
your
concern
to
her
since
she
sometimes
would
take
your
advice.So
it’s
unnecessary
for
me
to
go
with
you.What’s
more,I’ve
got
my
hands
full
tomorrow.
12.What
do
we
know
about
Elizabeth?
A.She’s
too
busy
to
see
a
doctor.
B.The
doctor’s
advice
does
her
no
good.
C.She
hasn’t
got
well
though
she’s
seen
a
doctor.
答案:C
13.Who
will
see
Elizabeth?
A.The
man.
B.The
woman.
C.Neither
of
them.
答案:A
听第9段材料,回答第14至17题。
W:Now,let
me
show
you
around
our
school.This
is
our
computer
lab.
M:Wow!
So
many
computers!
How
many
computers
do
you
have?
W:We
have
80
in
this
lab
and
we
have
another
40
in
another
lab.Besides
all
these,we
have
one
for
each
teacher.
M:Then,how
many
teachers
do
you
have?
W:88.The
teachers
are
using
the
computers
as
aids
in
their
classes.
M:Really?Can
we
go
into
the
classes
to
have
a
look?
W:Yes.This
is
an
English
class.The
teacher
is
explaining
new
words
with
the
help
of
the
computer.
M:How
nice!
It
is
easier
to
explain
the
words
with
the
help
of
the
computer.
W:And
it
saves
a
lot
of
time.
14.Where
does
this
talk
take
place?
A.In
a
school.
B.In
a
hotel.
C.In
an
office.
答案:A
15.How
many
computers
do
they
have
altogether?
A.80.　　　　B.168.　　　　　C.208.
答案:C
16.What
is
the
use
of
the
computer
in
class?
A.It
is
used
to
help
teachers
teach.
B.It
is
used
to
learn
new
words.
C.It
is
used
to
save
time.
答案:A
17.Why
do
they
use
the
computer
in
class?
A.They
use
it
to
make
the
work
easier
and
save
a
lot
of
time.
B.They
have
to.
C.They
like
to
use
it.
答案:A
听第10段材料,回答第18至20题。
Good
morning,everybody.My
topic
for
today
is
“Early
Money”.I’m
going
to
tell
you
something
about
money
used
in
the
early
days.To
be
honest,we
know
little
about
how
early
people
came
to
use
money,but
we
do
know
some
things
which
have
been
used
as
money.In
early
times,in
some
European
countries,salt
was
used
as
money.In
some
parts
of
Asia,tea
was
used
for
money.The
American
Indians
used
nuts
and
other
things.Perhaps
the
most
common
money
of
all
were
animals
of
some
kind.In
some
places
today,cows
are
still
used
as
a
kind
of
money.So
you
see,things
highly
valued
by
everybody
may
serve
as
money.
The
Chinese
were
the
first
people
to
use
coins
as
money.Oh,sorry,you
don’t
know
the
word?Well,it
is
spelled
C-O-I-N.Here
are
some
coins
of
the
past.You
can
come
over
and
have
a
look.
18.What
did
the
speaker
want
to
tell
the
listeners
about?
A.The
kinds
of
things
which
will
serve
as
money
in
the
future.
B.The
money
used
in
the
early
days.
C.The
fact
that
the
Chinese
people
were
the
earliest
users
of
money.
答案:B
19.According
to
the
speech,which
of
the
following
might
have
been
used
for
money
by
early
Japanese?
A.Tea.
B.Salt.
C.Nuts.
答案:A
20.What
was
the
common
character
of
the
things
used
for
money?
A.They
were
difficult
to
get.
B.They
had
some
practical
use.
C.They
were
considered
valuable
by
all
people.
答案:C
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
In
America,when
the
eighth
graders
leave
the
middle
school,they
are
often
worried
about
moving
to
the
high
school.It
is
a
hard
time
for
them,but
it
can
be
an
exciting
one
as
well.To
make
it
easier,students
need
to
get
familiar
with
their
school.
Even
though
they’ve
done
this
already
in
the
middle
school,it’s
still
important
to
find
where
their
classrooms
are.Most
schools
take
students
to
the
high
school
for
a
visit
at
the
end
of
their
eighth
grade
year.And,most
schools
also
have
a
freshman
(新生)speech
for
parents
and
students
before
the
first
year
begins.Sometimes
the
main
office
will
give
away
a
map
of
the
school.This
can
help
students
and
parents
to
find
different
places
in
the
school.
One
way
to
know
your
high
school
more
and
make
new
friends
is
to
join
a
club
or
play
a
sport.Schools
often
offer
chances
to
join
different
clubs
and
sports.Fall
activities
begin
in
August
before
the
first
day
of
school.If
you
are
not
interested
in
sports,there
are
clubs
for
any
interest,such
as
drama,dance,chess,photography,community
service,etc.These
clubs
allow
students
from
different
grades.By
joining
an
activity,students
can
find
new
friendships,not
to
mention
improving
their
chances
in
future
college
applications(申请).The
school
office
will
have
a
list
of
activities
offered
at
the
school
and
information
on
how
to
join
them.
What’s
more,to
have
a
great
start
to
a
high
school
year,students
can
write
down
some
of
their
worries,and
ask
for
help
from
teachers
and
school
workers.
21.According
to
the
text,most
students
feel
　　　when
entering
the
high
school.?
A.unhappy
B.nervous
C.lonely
D.disappointed
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。文章第一段的第一句中“they
are
often
worried
about
moving
to
the
high
school”的worried
与B选项nervous同义,故B项为正确选项。
22.What
can
be
learned
about
the
school
clubs?
A.There
are
fewer
students
from
higher
grades
in
the
school
clubs.
B.The
school
clubs
in
high
school
mainly
welcome
sports
fans.
C.The
school
office
can
help
new
students
join
school
clubs.
D.Summer
activities
begin
before
school
starts.
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。根据第三段的最后一句“The
school
office
will
have
a
list
of
activities
offered
at
the
school
and
information
on
how
to
join
them.”可知其内容与C选项内容一致,故C项为正确选项。
23.When
do
many
schools
take
students
to
visit
their
new
high
school?
A.Before
the
eighth
grade
year
starts.
B.Right
after
the
high
school
year
starts.
C.At
the
beginning
of
the
new
term
in
the
high
school.
D.By
the
end
of
the
last
year
in
the
middle
school.
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。由文章第二段中的第二句“Most
schools
take
students
to
the
high
school
for
a
visit
at
the
end
of
their
eighth
grade
year.”可知D项为正确选项。
24.What
is
the
purpose
of
this
text?
A.To
describe
high
school
life.
B.To
give
advice
to
new
high
school
students.
C.To
teach
useful
experience.
D.To
introduce
new
schools.
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。纵观全文,文章主要围绕着美国高中新生如何适应高中生活这一话题展开的。故选B项。
B
A
Russian,a
Cuban(古巴人),an
American
businessman
and
an
American
lawyer
were
on
a
train
travelling
across
England.The
Russian
took
out
a
large
bottle
of
vodka(伏特加酒),gave
each
of
the
men
a
drink
and
then
threw
the
rest
half
bottle
of
vodka
out
of
the
window.
“Why
did
you
do
that?”
asked
the
American
businessman.
“There’s
too
much
vodka
in
my
country,”
said
the
Russian.“And
we
really
have
more
than
we
will
ever
use.”
A
little
later,the
Cuban
passed
around
fine
Havana
Cigars(雪茄烟).Then
he
threw
the
rest
out
of
the
window.
“I
thought
Cuba
is
not
a
rich
country,”the
businessman
said.“But
you
threw
that
very
good
cigars
out
of
the
window!”
“Cigars,”
the
Cuban
answered,“are
the
cheapest
in
my
country.We
have
more
of
them
than
we
know
what
to
do
with.”
The
American
businessman
sat
quietly
for
a
moment.Then
he
got
up,caught
the
lawyer
by
the
arm
and
threw
him
out
of
the
window.
25.The
Russian
and
the
Cuban
both
wanted
to
　　　.?
A.tell
the
businessman
that
their
countries
are
rich
B.prove
that
they
were
rich
C.ask
the
two
Americans
to
visit
their
countries
D.make
the
businessman
happy
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。根据文中这两个人的行为及所说的话,可知这两个人都想证明自己的国家很富有,故选A项。
26.When
the
businessman
said
“I
thought
Cuba
is
not
a
rich
country”,he
meant
“　　　”?
A.Russia
is
richer
than
Cuba.
B.America
is
richer
than
Cuba
and
Russia.
C.You
shouldn’t
throw
those
very
good
cigars
away.
D.Do
you
have
more
cigars
than
me?
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。根据文章第五段可以确定答案。
27.What
did
the
businessman
want
to
say
by
throwing
the
lawyer
out
of
the
window?
A.I
want
to
buy
some
vodka.
B.We
have
too
many
lawyers
in
my
country.
C.I’ll
go
to
Cuba
and
do
some
business
of
cigars.
D.If
you
need
lawyers,come
to
America.
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。根据上下文可推知,B项正确。
28.Which
do
you
think
is
the
best
title
for
the
passage?
A.Travelling
across
England
B.Four
Rich
Men
C.You’re
Wasting
Too
Much
D.There’s
Too
Much
答案:D
解析:主旨大意题。根据对文章的整体理解,可以确定文章的标题是“太多了”。
C
The
first
time
I
went
for
a
walk
around
my
father-in-law’s
neighbourhood
in
America
was
Garbage
Day,and
I
was
shocked
to
see
what
people
were
throwing
out.
It
was
back
in
1981,and
I
saw
many
people
gather
in
someone’s
front
yard.As
I
went
nearer
to
see
what
was
happening,I
got
my
first
introduction
to
yard
sales.For
the
few
dollars
I
had
in
my
wallet,I
was
able
to
buy
a
seven-inch
black-and-white
portable
TV.I
also
bought
a
flashlight.
The
following
weekend,at
another
yard
sale,I
saw
a
14-inch
colour
TV
being
sold
for
almost
nothing.I
felt
I
could
not
miss
the
offer
and
bought
it.Now
I
had
two
sets
and
couldn’t
wait
to
see
what
else
I
could
afford
the
next
weekend.
Spring
ended,and
by
then
I
had
accumulated
almost
every
type
of
electronic
equipment
I
had
always
wished
to
have
back
home.
Then
this
new
idea
came
to
mind.I
had
heard
about
a
man
who
travelled
back
home
every
few
months.He
drove
a
truck
filled
with
boxes
of
new
and
used
stuff
that
people
were
sending
to
relatives.So
I
told
my
father
that
I
would
send
as
many
types
of
items
as
I
could
so
that
he
could
start
his
resale
business.
Every
few
months
I
would
gather
several
boxes
of
American
“junk”
televisions,toasters,fans,hair
dryers,etc.and
sent
them
home.As
word
got
out
about
my
father’s
“trash”
market,people
all
came
to
buy
these
things.
Three
years
later,when
I
visited
my
family
for
the
first
time
since
leaving
home,I
learned
that
many
of
the
families
in
our
neighborhood
had
a
piece
of
“trash”.It
proved
that
I
had
the
responsibility
to
keep
people
back
home
in
Guatemala
up
to
date
with
the
latest
technology
you
no
longer
need.
29.According
to
the
text,a
yard
sale
is
a
place
where
people
　　　.?
A.sell
their
front
yards
at
a
low
price
B.sell
unwanted
things
in
their
own
yards
C.gather
in
someone’s
yard
to
enjoy
things
D.throw
away
their
trash
in
someone’s
yard
答案:B
解析:第二段提到作者首次接触庭院销售,他仅用几美元就买了一台电视机和一个手电筒,由此可以推断,庭院销售指人们在自家的院子里出售不想要的东西。
30.The
author
felt
he
could
not
miss
the
offer
because
　　　.?
A.the
second
TV
set
was
bigger
B.the
second
TV
set
was
a
colour
TV
C.the
second
TV
set
was
very
cheap
D.he
wanted
two
TV
sets
very
much
答案:C
解析:结合第三段前两句的内容可知,作者之所以感觉不能错过这样的机会,是因为这台彩电非常便宜,几乎不用花钱。
31.What
did
the
author
think
of
the
“junk”
he
bought?
A.He
thought
they
were
valuable.
B.He
thought
they
were
not
worth
buying.
C.He
was
not
surprised
to
see
them
thrown
away.
D.He
thought
he
could
sell
them
for
a
good
price.
答案:A
解析:第四段中提到,作者收集了几乎所有类型的电子设备并一直希望把它们带回家,下文说,运回家的这些“垃圾”深受父老乡亲的喜爱,结合文章最后一句可知,作者认为自己购买的这些东西是有价值的。
32.From
the
passage
we
can
infer
that
　　　.?
A.the
author
comes
from
a
poor
place
B.the
author
often
goes
home
to
sell
the
“junk”
C.the
author
buys
the
“junk”
only
to
make
profits
D.the
“junk”
is
not
welcomed
in
the
author’s
hometown
答案:A
解析:作者购买的是庭院销售的廉价物品,运回自己的家乡后深受欢迎,文章最后作者说自己有责任让家乡的人们跟上最新技术的步伐,因此可以推测作者来自于一个贫穷的地方。
D
33.Sydney
Tower
is
　　　in
Sydney,Australia.?
A.the
busiest
street
B.the
biggest
station
C.the
most
beautiful
park
D.the
highest
point
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。根据广告中的Attraction部分的第二句,可知选D项。
34.If
you
want
to
book
a
ticket
to
Sydney
Tower,you
can’t
　　　.?
A.email
sydneytower@
hotmail.com
B.fax
02
9333
9203
C.search
www.sydneytower.com.au
D.dial
02
9333
9222
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。广告中提供了三种订票的方式,分别是by
phone(打电话),by
fax
(发传真)和
through
the
web
(通过网页),故可知答案选A项,因为A项是电子邮件。
35.Frank
wants
to
go
to
Sydney
Tower
with
his
two
children,so
he
will
pay
　　　.?
A.$60　　　　　　　　　B.$90
C.$120
D.$150
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。根据广告内容可知成人票60美元,儿童票30美元,故一个成人两个小孩共120美元,故选C项。
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
Taking
good
notes
is
a
time-saving
skill
that
will
help
you
to
become
a
better
student
in
several
ways.　36　Second,your
notes
are
excellent
materials
to
refer
to
when
you
are
studying
for
a
test.Third,note-taking
offers
variety
to
your
study
time
and
helps
you
to
hold
your
interest.?
You
will
want
to
take
notes
during
classroom
discussions
and
while
reading
a
textbook
or
doing
research
for
a
report.　37　
Whenever
or
however
you
take
notes,keep
in
mind
that
note-taking
is
a
selective
process.　38　?
The
following
methods
may
work
best
for
you.
●Read
the
text
quickly
to
find
the
main
facts
and
ideas
in
it.
●Carefully
read
the
text
and
watch
for
words
that
can
show
main
points
and
supporting
facts.
●Write
your
notes
in
your
own
words.
●　39　?
●Note
any
questions
or
ideas
you
may
have
about
what
was
said
or
written.
As
you
take
notes,you
may
want
to
use
your
own
shorthand(速记).When
you
do,be
sure
that
you
understand
your
symbols
and
that
you
use
them
all
the
time.　40　?
A.Use
words,not
complete
sentences.
B.There
are
three
practical
note-taking
methods.
C.You
must
write
your
notes
on
separate
paper.
D.Otherwise,you
may
not
be
able
to
read
your
notes
later.
E.You
will
also
want
to
develop
your
own
method
for
taking
notes.
F.That
means
you
must
first
decide
what
is
important
enough
to
include
in
your
notes.
G.First,the
simple
act
of
writing
something
down
makes
it
easier
for
you
to
understand
and
remember
it.
答案:36~40
GEFAD
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
Can
it
really
be
sixty-two
years
ago
that
I
first
saw
you?As
I
look
into
your
eyes
now,it
　41　
like
only
yesterday
that
I
first
saw
you,in
that
small
cafe
in
Hanover
Square.?
From
the
　42　
I
saw
you
smile,as
you
opened
the
door
for
that
young
mother
and
her
newborn
baby,I
knew
that
I
wanted
to
　43　
the
rest
of
my
life
with
you.?
I
cannot
tell
you
how
　44　
my
love
for
you
was
back
then,when
I
returned
to
you
on
leave
in
the
September.We
　45　
each
other
so
tight(紧地)
that
I
thought
we
would
burst.I
　46　
you
to
marry
me
the
very
same
day
and
I
cheered
with
　47　
when
you
looked
deep
into
my
eyes
and
said
“yes”
to
being
my
wife.?
I
　48　
being
so
enjoyed,when
a
year
later,you
　49　
held
my
hand
to
your
waist(腰)
and
said
in
my
　50　
that
we
were
going
to
be
a
family.I
know
both
our
　51　
love
you
dearly;they
are
outside
the
door
now,　52　.?
Do
you
remember
how
I
looked
like
a
mad
man
when
Jonathan
was
　53　?I
can
still
picture
you
　54　
at
me
now,as
I
held
him
for
the
very
first
time
in
my
arms.I
watched
as
your
laughter
died
away
into
　55　
and
I
looked
at
him
and
cried
my
own
tears
of
joy,too.?
I
know
you
are
　56　,my
dear,and
I
must
let
you
　57　.But
I
love
you
so
much
and
it
　58　
to
do
so.I
must
go
now,my
darling.Our
children
are
waiting
outside.They
want
to
say
　59　
to
you.?
I
am
sad
that
you
had
to
leave
me,but
please
don’t
　60　.I
will
be
with
you
soon.?
41.A.sounds
B.seems
C.looks
D.tastes
答案:B
解析:六十二年前第一次见面好像是昨天的事情。用seems
like表示“好像”。
42.A.moment
B.place
C.restaurant
D.year
答案:A
解析:“你为那位年轻的妈妈和她的婴儿开门时微笑”是个短暂的动作,应用moment,即“从那个时刻起”。
43.A.save
B.win
C.share
D.waste
答案:C
解析:由第三段最后一句可知,她成了作者的妻子。因此,此处表示“我想和你共度余生”。
44.A.high
B.weak
C.strong
D.thick
答案:C
解析:表示爱的程度,应用形容词strong。
45.A.took
B.held
C.made
D.put
答案:B
解析:动词hold有“握着,抱着”的含义。
46.A.asked
B.thought
C.guessed
D.ordered
答案:A
解析:此处表示“我请求你嫁给我”。动词ask表示“请求”。
47.A.joy
B.interest
C.surprise
D.anger
答案:A
解析:由下面的“said
‘yes’
to
being
my
wife”可推知,既然女孩答应自己的求婚,男子应是很高兴地欢呼。
48.A.finish
B.hate
C.forget
D.remember
答案:D
解析:因为“我”在向妻子倾诉,所以应是作者记得以前的情景。
49.A.suddenly
B.hard
C.gently
D.carelessly
答案:C
解析:由下文的“we
were
going
to
be
a
family”可知,作者的妻子怀孕了。因此,此处应是“轻轻地”,用gently。
50.A.head
B.hand
C.ear
D.mouth
答案:C
解析:要告诉丈夫事情,当然是在“耳边”说。
51.A.parents
B.children
C.doctors
D.neighbours
答案:B
解析:此处指孩子们。该答案也可由倒数第二段中的“Our
children
are
waiting
outside.”得出。
52.A.singing
B.playing
C.resting
D.waiting
答案:D
解析:由倒数第二段“Our
children
are
waiting
outside.”中的waiting可以得出答案。
53.A.born
B.young
C.pleased
D.wrong
答案:A
解析:孩子的出生让作者高兴得像疯了一样。
54.A.crying
B.shouting
C.laughing
D.listening
答案:C
解析:看着丈夫初次抱着儿子的样子,妻子放声大笑。该答案可由下一句中的“your
laughter”得出。
55.A.tears
B.sleep
C.death
D.excitement
答案:A
解析:由and后的“cried
my
own
tears
of
joy,too”可以得出答案。
56.A.great
B.tired
C.late
D.worried
答案:B
解析:由整篇文章我们可知,作者的妻子已经去世,该文章写的是作者向妻子告别的话语。此处用tired表示“我知道你累了”,用来指妻子要永远休息了。
57.A.drive
B.run
C.jump
D.go
答案:D
解析:用let
you
go表示“我必须让你走了”。
58.A.ends
B.starts
C.hurts
D.smiles
答案:C
解析:由“我很爱你”可知,这么做(让你走)“很痛苦”。
59.A.goodbye
B.hello
C.news
D.stories
答案:A
解析:在作者向妻子说完心里话之后,外面等待的孩子们也要向母亲告别了。
60.A.wait
B.worry
C.wake
D.miss
答案:B
解析:由下面的“我很快就和你在一起了”可知,此处安慰妻子“不要担心”。
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
I’m
Jan
Hasek,61.　　　　　　
old
miner
from
the
Czech
Republic.In
April
1945
I
62.　　　　　　
(hear)something
explode
at
midnight.I
got
up
and
63.　　　　　　
(run)outside.The
sound
came
from
a
mine
64.
hadn’t
been
used
for
a
long
time.Suddenly
I
saw
some
German
soldiers
65.　　　　　　the
light
of
the
moon.They
66.(take)
wooden
boxes
from
trucks
and
putting
them
in
the
mine.?
A
week
later
I
decided
67.　　　　　　　　
(go)
and
see
for
myself.To
my
surprise
the
entrance
68.　　　　　　
the
mine
was
closed.Some
people
say
that
the
Amber
Room
and
some
gold
69.　　　　　　　　　
(bury)
in
the
mine.I
think
it
might
be
so,as
the
Amber
Room
has
never
70.(find).?
答案:61.an　62.heard　63.ran　64.that/which　65.by　66.were
taking　67.to
go　68.to　69.were
buried　70.been
found
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
This
morning
on
my
way
to
school
I
was
deep
moved
by
what
I
saw
outside
a
bank.An
old
man
was
counting
his
money
in
the
front
of
the
bank.Suddenly
a
young
man
came
running
and
knocked
him
down.To
make
things
bad,his
money
was
lying
in
all
direction.In
no
time
the
people
around
rush
to
pick
the
money
up
while
the
old
man
stood
there,not
know
what
to
do.Surprisingly,everyone
gave
back
the
money
they
had
just
picked.The
old
man
counted
the
money
again
and
found
that
not
a
single
bill
was
missed.To
my
great
joy,there
are
now
a
lot
of
nice
people
in
your
life.It’s
true
what
honesty
is
more
important
than
money!
答案:第一句:deep→deeply
第二句:去掉front前的the
第四句:bad→worse;direction→directions
第五句:rush→rushed;know→knowing
第六句:picked
后加up
第七句:missed→missing
第八句:your→our
第九句:what→that
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
假定你是李华,正在一所英国学校学习暑期课程,遇到一些困难,希望得到学校辅导中心(Learning
Center)的帮助。根据学校规定,你需书面预约,请按下列要点写一封信:
1.本人简介;
2.求助内容;
3.约定时间;
4.你的联系方式(Email
address:lihua@126.com;Phone
number:12345678)。
注意:1.词数100左右;2.可以适当增加细节,以使行文连贯;3.开头和结束语已为你写好。
Dear
Sir/Madam,
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Looking
forward
to
your
reply.
Yours,
Li
Hua
参考范文:
Dear
Sir/Madam,?
I’m
Li
Hua,a
Chinese
student
taking
summer
courses
in
your
university.I’m
writing
to
ask
for
some
help.I
came
here
last
month
and
found
my
courses
interesting.But
I
have
some
difficulties
with
note-taking
and
I
have
no
idea
of
how
to
use
the
library.I
was
told
the
Learning
Center
provides
help
for
students
and
I’m
anxious
to
get
help
from
you.I
have
no
class
on
Tuesday
mornings
and
Friday
afternoons.Please
let
me
know
which
day
is
OK
with
you.You
may
email
or
phone
me.My
email
address
is
lihua@126.com
and
phone
number
is
12345678.
Looking
forward
to
your
reply.?
Yours,
Li
Hua
?第三单元测评
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
W:What
do
you
think
we
need
to
buy
for
our
new
kitchen?
M:We’ve
got
a
fridge
and
a
dinner
table
already.We
need
some
chairs.
1.What
do
the
speakers
need
to
buy?
A.A
few
chairs.
B.A
fridge.
C.A
dinner
table.
M:I
like
to
stay
two
nights,please.
W:Do
you
want
full
board
or
half
board?
M:What’s
the
difference?
W:Full
board
includes
all
meals,and
half
board
includes
just
breakfast
and
dinner.
2.Where
are
the
speakers?
A.In
a
restaurant.
B.In
a
hotel.
C.In
a
school.
M:Shouldn’t
we
invite
Cathy
to
the
party
tonight?
W:Invite
Cathy?She
is
the
one
who
is
planning
the
whole
thing.
3.What
does
the
woman
mean?
A.Cathy
is
too
busy
to
come.
B.Cathy
is
going
to
be
invited.
C.Cathy
will
be
at
the
party.
M:Did
you
say
you
were
driving
to
town
this
morning?
W:Yes.I
have
to
draw
some
money
from
the
bank
to
pay
my
bookstore
bills.
4.Why
does
the
woman
plan
to
go
to
town?
A.To
pay
her
bills
in
the
bank.
B.To
get
some
money
from
the
bank.
C.To
buy
books
in
a
bookstore.
M:What
are
you
working
on
so
hard?
W:An
article
for
the
newspaper.If
I’m
late,it
won’t
get
printed
until
next
week.
5.What
is
the
woman
trying
to
do?
A.Print
an
article.
B.Finish
some
writing.
C.Find
a
newspaper.
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6、7题。
M:Excuse
me.I
think
you
are
in
my
seat.
W:Sorry,but
it
says
7A
on
my
boarding
card.
M:Oh,um...right.I
asked
for
a
window
seat,you
see.
W:Yeah,so
did
I.What’s
your
seat
number?
M:Let’s
see.Oh,it’s
8A.
W:So
I
guess
you
are
in
the
seat
behind
me.
M:Oh,yes.Sorry
about
that.
6.What
is
the
man
doing?
A.Changing
seats
on
the
plane.
B.Asking
for
a
window
seat.
C.Trying
to
find
his
seat.
7.What
is
the
woman’s
seat
number?
A.6A.　　　　　B.7A.　　　　　C.8A.
听第7段材料,回答第8、9题。
M:Can
I
help
you?
W:Yes.How
much
are
these
T-shirts?
M:They
are
12
dollars
50
cents
each.
W:I
like
the
green
one,but
it
isn’t
big
enough.Have
you
got
a
larger
size?
M:Just
a
minute.No,I’m
sorry,we
haven’t.What
about
the
black
one?
W:No,it’s
too
dark.I
prefer
something
lighter,yellow
or
pink.
M:How
about
the
pink
one?
W:Yes.That’s
nice.I’ll
take
it.
M:That’s
12
dollars
50
cents
then,please.
W:Here
you
are.
8.Why
doesn’t
the
woman
take
the
green
T-shirt?
A.It’s
too
small.
B.It’s
too
dark.
C.It’s
too
expensive.
9.What
does
the
woman
buy
in
the
end?
A.A
yellow
T-shirt.
B.A
blue
T-shirt.
C.A
pink
T-shirt.
听第8段材料,回答第10至12题。
W:So
how
long
have
you
been
living
in
London?
M:Umm...a
couple
of
years.How
long
have
you
been
working
here?
W:Only
a
few
months.I
moved
down
here
for
the
job.There
was
no
work
for
me
where
I
came
from.
M:Where
did
you
come
from
then?
W:I
came
from
a
small
village
called
Arnside,near
Lancaster
a
year
ago.Umm...there
was
nothing
to
do
there,so
I
moved
to
London.
M:Do
you
enjoy
working
here
in
this
restaurant?
W:Very
much.
10.How
long
has
the
man
been
in
London?
A.One
year.
B.A
few
years.
C.A
couple
of
months.
11.Why
did
the
woman
leave
her
home
town?
A.To
find
a
job.
B.To
lead
a
city
life.
C.To
open
a
restaurant.
12.Where
did
the
woman
come
from?
A.London.
B.Arnside.
C.Lancaster.
听第9段材料,回答第13至16题。
M:I’m
sure
you’ve
noticed
a
lot
of
things
that
are
different
about
our
school.
W:Oh,yes.In
the
United
States,we
don’t
have
to
carry
a
big
school
bag
with
us
like
you
do.
M:Why
is
that?
W:We
have
a
locker
of
our
own
which
is
a
small
box
with
a
lock.We
keep
textbooks
and
our
personal
things
in
it.I
just
bring
a
daypack
to
home.
M:A
daypack?
W:Yes.It’s
a
small
bag
that
you
carry
on
your
back.
M:What
do
you
carry
in
it?
W:My
notebooks
or
a
few
books
for
homework.
M:That’s
convenient.Is
there
anything
else
you’ve
noticed
about
our
school?
W:Yes.I
am
surprised
that
everyone
is
so
silent
in
class.
M:What
do
you
mean?
W:Well,we
usually
ask
questions
about
exams,homework
or
textbooks
on
the
first
day
of
the
school
year.The
teacher
likes
such
questions.
M:So
you
felt
it
different?
W:Yes.I
expected
to
see
a
lot
of
discussions
in
class
because
we
learn
that
way
in
the
United
States.
M:I
see.That
will
be
a
good
topic
for
our
school
newspaper
for
the
first
month
of
the
term.Nice
talking
with
you.See
you
around.Bye!
W:Bye!
13.What
is
a
daypack?
A.A
box.
B.A
lock.
C.A
bag.
14.What
surprises
the
girl
at
school?
A.Few
students
asking
questions
in
class.
B.A
lot
of
discussions
in
class.
C.Teachers
giving
little
homework.
15.At
what
time
of
the
school
term
does
the
conversation
most
probably
take
place?
A.At
the
end
of
it.
B.In
the
middle
of
it.
C.At
the
beginning
of
it.
16.What
do
we
know
about
the
girl?
A.She
is
new
to
the
school.
B.She
writes
for
the
school
newspaper.
C.She
seldom
asks
questions
in
class.
听第10段材料,回答第17至20题。
W:Good
morning,everybody!
Today
for
our
writing
class,we
are
glad
to
have
Mr
Henry
Stone
with
us,a
well-known
writer
in
this
country.He
is
going
to
share
with
us
his
writing
experiences.Now,Henry,please
tell
us
how
you
find
so
many
interesting
things
for
your
stories?
M:Okay.I
watch
people
a
lot.I
do
that
when
I
travel.I’ve
been
to
many
countries
such
as
Britain,Italy
and
Sweden,so
I
spend
a
lot
of
time
at
airports.While
waiting
for
my
flights,I
watch
people
passing
by
and
start
my
imagination.For
example,the
other
day
when
I
was
waiting
for
my
flight
to
Greece,I
saw
a
couple.They
were
buying
magazines
at
that
moment.They
were
not
wearing
business
clothes
but
the
man
was
carrying
a
suitcase.Every
few
seconds
the
woman
looked
around.I
wondered
if
someone
was
following
them.Perhaps
they
were
running
away
and....You
know,this
reminded
me
of
a
story
in
the
newspaper
that
day.A
bank
clerk
stole
one
million
pounds
a
week
before
and
disappeared
with
his
wife.There
was
a
picture
of
them
in
the
paper.The
couple
really
looked
like
the
thieves.Maybe
I
should
stop
them.Just
then,I
saw
them
say
goodbye
to
each
other,and
the
woman
walked
away.Well,sometimes
I
make
mistakes
like
that.But
I
find
things
like
that
very
useful.
17.What
does
Mr
Henry
Stone
do?
A.A
bank
clerk.
B.A
teacher.
C.A
writer.
18.What
does
Henry
like
doing
at
airports?
A.Watching
people.
B.Telling
stories.
C.Reading
magazines.
19.What
did
Henry
learn
from
the
newspaper
that
day?
A.A
valuable
suitcase
was
missing.
B.A
man
stole
money
from
a
bank.
C.A
woman
ran
away
from
home.
20.Why
was
the
woman
at
the
airport?
A.She
was
traveling
on
business.
B.She
was
seeing
the
man
off.
C.She
was
leaving
for
Greece.
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
It
was
1504,and
Columbus
was
making
another
trip
to
the
New
World.Columbus
and
his
men
needed
fresh
water
and
food
after
three
months
at
sea.They
saw
an
island
and
went
on
shore.On
the
island
there
were
unfriendly
Indians
who
refused
to
give
food
to
them.Columbus’
men
were
afraid
of
the
Indians,but
he
had
a
clever
plan.He
used
sign
language
to
tell
the
Indians
about
his
mysterious
(神秘的)
power
to
turn
off
the
light
in
the
sky.He
knew
about
a
lunar
eclipse
(月蚀)
the
next
night
because
the
information
was
in
his
almanac
(天文历书).Columbus
told
the
Indians,“Tomorrow
night
I’ll
turn
off
the
light
in
the
sky.”
But
they
didn’t
believe
him.When
the
eclipse
began
the
next
night,the
Indians
became
very
frightened.They
begged
Columbus
to
turn
on
the
light
again,and
they
quickly
gave
him
all
the
food
and
water
he
wanted.Immediately
Columbus
and
his
men
hurried
back
to
the
ship
and
sailed
away
in
the
moonless
night.
21.Why
did
Columbus
and
his
men
stop
at
the
island?
A.Because
they
wanted
to
meet
the
Indians
there.
B.Because
they
hoped
to
get
supplies
of
food
and
water.
C.Because
they
had
never
been
on
the
island
before.
D.Because
they
had
planned
to
visit
it.
A.were
glad
to
see
B.were
kind
to
C.welcomed
D.were
not
kind
to
23.How
did
Columbus
tell
the
Indians
that
he
had
mysterious
power?
A.He
used
movements
of
hands
and
expressions
in
his
face.
B.He
spoke
in
the
language
of
the
Indians.
C.He
drew
a
lot
of
signs.
D.He
wrote
in
the
language
of
the
Indians.
24.The
Indians
gave
Columbus
food
and
water
because
they
　　　.?
A.believed
Columbus
was
a
man
with
mysterious
power
B.were
interested
in
Columbus’
trip
C.wanted
to
help
Columbus
D.were
clever
B
People
who
like
travelling
have
their
reasons.They
believe
that
travelling
can
help
them
expand
their
field
of
view,especially
in
the
geographical
and
historical
sense.They
also
think
that
touring
will
give
them
more
chances
to
enjoy
different
kinds
of
food
and
experience
new
things
that
would
never
be
brought
by
other
activities.But
those
who
dislike
travelling
also
have
some
reasons.
Travelling,in
my
opinion,does
more
good
than
harm.Most
importantly,it
broadens(使扩大)our
mind.We
can
get
in
touch
with
other
civilizations(文明),cultures,customs
and
ideas.
Through
history,most
people
travelled
because
of
necessity(必要性)—not
for
pleasure.People
travelled
just
in
order
to
remain
alive.They
searched
for
food
to
eat
or
places
to
live
in.They
sometimes
ran
away
from
enemies.This
is
not
to
say
that
no
one
ever
travelled
just
for
fun
of
it.In
ancient
times,for
example,rich
Romans
travelled
all
the
way
to
Greece
to
take
part
in
the
Olympic
Games,and
festivals.Of
course,some
people
decided
to
travel
just
out
of
curiosity(好奇心).They
wanted
to
find
out
what
it
looked
like
beyond
the
horizon(地平线).Also
business
travel
has
been
going
on
for
centuries.Traders
could
not
only
make
money
but
also
learn
to
speak
several
languages
and
be
introduced
to
different
cultures.
So,travelling
does
enrich
our
mind
and
draw
new
ideas
to
us.There
is
no
doubt
that
we
can
get
much
from
it.
25.The
underlined
word“expand”in
Paragraph
1
can
be
replaced
by
“　　　”.?
A.widen
B.protect
C.lose
D.decide
26.According
to
the
passage,in
the
past
most
people
travelled
　　　.?
A.for
fun
B.for
knowledge
C.to
get
experiences
D.to
make
a
living
27.How
many
reasons
for
travelling
are
mentioned
in
Paragraph
3?
A.Three.
B.Four.
C.Five.
D.Six.
28.In
the
writer’s
opinion,travelling
can
be
　　　.?
A.expensive
B.funny
C.helpful
D.tiring
C
Americans
spend
their
holidays
in
different
ways.Some
of
them
like
to
travel
abroad
and
get
to
know
something
about
the
foreign
countries.For
example,they
may
go
to
China
and
learn
about
its
old
traditions
and
habits.However,this
kind
of
trip
is
not
always
pleasant.First,it
is
not
so
convenient
and
second
the
service
they
receive
in
the
foreign
countries
is
not
quite
satisfactory.
Some
of
the
Americans
enjoy
travelling
within
their
own
states,usually
going
to
the
seaside
towns
or
cities
during
summer.They
may
stay
there
for
one
or
two
weeks
and
then
come
back
home.This
kind
of
trip
is
always
cheaper
and
pleasant.
Another
group
care
for
travelling
very
much.They
just
get
on
a
plane
in
the
morning
and
get
off
a
ship
in
the
evening.They
like
to
go
across
the
country,from
north
to
south,and
west
to
east.
For
the
last
group,they
just
want
to
stay
at
home
and
do
their
housework
with
the
radio
or
the
television
on.They
say
holiday
is
the
time
for
rest,not
for
travelling.
29.Some
Americans
like
to
travel
to
the
outside
because
　　　.?
A.their
own
country
has
nothing
interesting
B.the
outside
world
is
very
advanced
C.they
want
to
know
something
about
the
history
of
some
countries
D.they
have
a
lot
of
money
and
cannot
spend
them
all
in
their
own
country
30.There
is
something
that
the
foreigners
are
not
very
satisfied
with
when
they
travel
outside.It
is
　　　.?
A.the
food
B.the
habit
C.the
people
they
meet
D.the
service
31.If
an
American
wants
to
go
abroad
for
his
holiday,he
probably
goes
to
　　　to
learn
about
ancient
culture.?
A.Egypt
B.Australia
C.England
D.Canada
32.Some
Americans
don’t
like
travelling
in
their
holidays,because
　　　.?
A.they
are
lazy
B.they
don’t
have
much
money
C.they
like
to
rest
at
home
D.they
like
watching
TV
D
Mr
Brown
worked
in
a
factory
of
a
small
town.He
had
been
there
for
twenty
years
before
one
day
he
was
sent
to
the
capital
for
important
business.He
was
quite
excited
because
he
had
never
been
there
before.Before
he
set
off,he
asked
his
wife
and
three
daughters
if
they
wanted
him
to
buy
something
for
them
in
London.Mrs
Brown
began
to
think
it
over
and
then
she
said
she
wished
her
husband
would
be
able
to
buy
a
nice
umbrella
for
her,and
so
did
their
three
daughters.As
he
was
afraid
he
would
forget
it,he
drew
an
umbrella
on
his
hand.To
his
regret,he
lost
it
at
the
station.
On
the
train
Mr
Brown
sat
opposite
to
an
old
woman.The
woman’s
umbrella
was
so
nice
that
he
carefully
looked
at
it
and
said
to
himself
not
to
forget
to
buy
a
few
umbrellas
like
it.When
the
train
arrived
at
the
station
in
London,he
said
goodbye
to
the
old
woman,took
his
bag
and
her
umbrella
and
was
going
to
get
off.
“Wait
a
minute,sir,”shouted
the
old
woman.“That’s
my
umbrella!”
Now
Mr
Brown
noticed
that
he
had
taken
her
umbrella.His
face
turned
red
at
once
and
said
in
a
hurry,“Oh,I’m
very
sorry,madam!
I
didn’t
mean
it!”
Seven
days
later
Mr
Brown
left
the
capital.To
his
surprise,he
met
the
old
woman
and
sat
opposite
to
her
again.Looking
at
his
four
umbrellas,the
old
woman
was
satisfied
with
herself.“It
seems
that
I
was
luckier
than
the
other
four
women.”She
thought.
33.We
learn
from
the
passage
that
Mr
Brown
was
　　　.?
A.a
conductor
B.a
worker
C.a
thief
D.an
umbrella
maker
34.What
does
the
underlined
word
“it”
in
the
first
paragraph
refer
to?
A.His
ticket.
B.His
bag.
C.His
drawing.
D.His
umbrella.
35.Why
did
Mr
Brown
take
the
woman’s
umbrella?
A.Because
he
was
lost
in
thought.
B.Because
it
was
much
like
his
own.
C.Because
he
thought
the
woman
didn’t
notice
it.
D.Because
the
woman
misplaced
it.
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
　36　
Being
angry
doesn’t
really
solve
much,but
what
people
do
when
they
feel
angry
is
important.The
goal
is
to
calm
yourself
down
and
try
to
solve
what
is
bothering
you.This
is
hard
for
some
kids
and
adults,too.Instead
of
calming
down,some
kids
might
keep
getting
more
and
more
upset
until
they
explode
like
a
volcano(像火山爆发)!?
　37　Their
anger
might
be
so
strong
that
they
lose
control
of
their
temper.They
may
act
in
ways
unacceptable
and
hurtful.People
may
say
that
someone
has
trouble
controlling
their
temper.　38　?
Some
kids
might
get
so
angry
that
they
scream
at
their
parents,break
something,or
even
worse,hit
their
brothers
or
sisters.　39　However,it’s
not
OK
for
a
kid
to
do
any
of
those
things.Kids
don’t
want
to
act
in
this
way,but
sometimes
angry
feelings
can
be
hard
to
manage.So
what
to
do??
Well,the
good
news
is
that
kids
don’t
just
have
to
keep
making
the
same
mistakes
over
and
over
again.　40　Imagine
your
temper
as
a
puppy(幼犬)inside
you
that
needs
some
training.The
puppy
is
not
bad—it
will
probably
turn
out
a
great
dog.It
just
needs
to
learn
some
rules
because,right
now,that
puppy
is
causing
some
problems
to
you.?
A.You
can
train
your
temper.
B.You
don’t
want
to
cause
trouble.
C.Kids
should
be
allowed
to
express
their
feelings,even
angry
ones.
D.Everybody
gets
angry
sometimes.
E.In
fact,they
usually
mean
that
a
kid
behaves
badly
when
feeling
angry.
F.Instead
of
thinking
of
the
person
you’re
angry
with,think
of
something
else.
G.Some
kids
get
angry
more
often
or
more
easily
than
some
other
kids.
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
I
went
there
in
1924;no
local
planes
in
those
days,so
I
made
the
trip
by
bus.It
was
a
thousand
kilometers,and
it
　41　
twenty
hours.I
sat
by
a
man
about
my
own
age,24.He
said
his
name
was
Karl
Packey,but
he
told
me
　42　
anything
else.?
He
disappointed
me
because
he
had
so
little
to
say.No
opinions,no
memories,no
stories
to
　43　.Had
his
home,his
life,the
war
and
so
on
left
no
mark
at
all
on
him?It
was
very
　44　.I
was
glad
when
the
pillows
were
given
　45　,and
I
could
politely
try
to
sleep.I
hoped
I
would
never
meet
him
again.The
next
time
I
went
to
Fairburn
was
in
1974.By
　46　,of
course.The
president
was
going
to
“open”
the
new
town,　47　
had
taken
twenty-six
years
to
be
built.I
sat
next
to
a
man
of
about
fifty,whose
face
was
a
　48　.I
guessed
he
had
something
　49　
to
tell
me.?
The
face
was
rough,brown
and
　50　
with
age
and
worry.There
were
two
old
scars
(伤痕)
in
his
face.But
　51　
them,I
saw
　52　
and
power.I
guessed
he
was
the
boss
of
　53　.Perhaps
he
hadn’t
expected
the
big
job
and
hadn’t
wanted
it.?
He
had
done
it
well,no
doubt.The
thing
had
clearly
　54　
him
the
power
of
decision.We
started
to
talk...The
next
two
hours
were
for
me
the
most
interesting,adventurous,even
exciting
that
I
remember.He
kept
me
silent,　55　
with
wonder.Our
plane
　56　
Fairburn.I
　57　
his
hand
and
thanked
him
for
making
the
journey
so
　58　.I
told
him
my
name.“The
pleasure
was
　59　,”
he
said,“I
was
Chief
Engineer
here
at
Fairburn
until
last
year.I
built
the
new
town.Karl
Packer
is
the
name.Haven’t
we
met
before
　60　?”?
41.A.took
B.spent
C.lost
D.had
42.A.hardly
B.almost
C.nearly
D.mostly
43.A.say
B.speak
C.tell
D.talk
44.A.puzzling
B.interesting
C.exciting
D.wondering
45.A.in
B.up
C.out
D.with
46.A.bus
B.land
C.air
D.sea
47.A.it
B.that
C.which
D.this
48.A.book
B.mirror
C.picture
D.window
49.A.good
B.bad
C.wrong
D.old
50.A.cleaned
B.washed
C.lined
D.broken
51.A.on
B.above
C.over
D.in
52.A.success
B.sadness
C.fear
D.failure
53.A.something
B.anything
C.nothing
D.everything
54.A.taught
B.offered
C.gave
D.showed
55.A.open-mouth
B.opened-mouth
C.open-mouthed
D.opening-mouth
56.A.landed
at
B.landed
in
C.landed
to
D.landed
57.A.hit
B.shook
C.seized
D.caught
58.A.pleasant
B.pleasure
C.pleased
D.pleasing
59.A.my
B.mine
C.me
D.I
60.A.somewhere
B.anywhere
C.nowhere
D.everywhere
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
I’m
very
glad
to
hear
that
you
are
going
to
have
a
journey
to
Australia.I
have
read
a
good
book
about
it
and
I
want
to
recommend
(推荐)
61.　　　　　　
to
you.The
book
62.
(write)
by
Lee
Mylne
was
first
published
(出版)
in
November,2008.Many
things
about
Australia
63.　　　　　　　　　　
(talk)
about
in
this
book.From
it
you’ll
know
much
about
Australia.Take
sports
64.　　　　　　
example.People
65.　　　　　　
live
there
like
outdoor
sports
such
as
surfing,66.　　　　　　　　　
(swim),cycling
and
so
on.When
it
67.　　　　　　
(come)
to
animals,kangaroos
are
the
unique
(独特的)
animals
of
this
land.Many
famous
68.　　　　　　
(place)
are
also
introduced
in
the
book.The
price
of
the
book
is
100
yuan,69.　　　　　　
it
is
60
yuan
through
online
shopping,which
will
save
you
40
yuan.?
I’m
sure
with
the
help
of
this
book,you
70.
(know)
Australia
better
during
the
two-week
journey.
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
Dear
Mary,
I
receive
your
email
yesterday.Don’t
worry
about
me.I’m
getting
on
well
with
my
research
in
the
lab.But
to
my
great
surprise,you
say
you
will
give
up
learn
English.The
reason
is
that
you
have
not
done
well
recently
but
lost
interest.I’m
afraid
I
can’t
agree
with
you.I
know
it
is
difficulty
to
learn
English,but
English
is
wide
used
in
the
world
today.It
will
be
important
tool
in
our
future
work.Beside,it
is
becoming
more
and
more
important
in
your
daily
life.If
you
study
hard,you
will
be
succeed.Please
remember
where
there
is
a
will,there
is
a
way.
I’m
looking
forward
to
hear
good
news
from
you.
Yours,
Li
Hua
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
根据下列表格内容,写一则旅行日记。
时间
7月5日,星期六,天气晴朗
地点
天涯海角(Ultima
Thule)
抵达方式
乘校车
出发时间
上午七点二十分
续表
到达时间
上午九点半
活动内容
上午:在沙滩上做游戏,在饭店吃午饭
下午:英语讲故事比赛,颁奖,照相
返回时间
下午五点半
注意:1.表格中所列内容不得遗漏,意思连贯,表达清楚。
2.日记的开头和结尾已给出,不计入总词数。
3.词数:100左右。
Saturday,July
5th
Fine
Today
we
went
on
an
organized
trip
to
Ultima
Thule.
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
What
a
good
trip
we
had
today!I’ll
never
forget
it.
第三单元测评
答案
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
W:What
do
you
think
we
need
to
buy
for
our
new
kitchen?
M:We’ve
got
a
fridge
and
a
dinner
table
already.We
need
some
chairs.
1.What
do
the
speakers
need
to
buy?
A.A
few
chairs.
B.A
fridge.
C.A
dinner
table.
答案:A
M:I
like
to
stay
two
nights,please.
W:Do
you
want
full
board
or
half
board?
M:What’s
the
difference?
W:Full
board
includes
all
meals,and
half
board
includes
just
breakfast
and
dinner.
2.Where
are
the
speakers?
A.In
a
restaurant.
B.In
a
hotel.
C.In
a
school.
答案:B
M:Shouldn’t
we
invite
Cathy
to
the
party
tonight?
W:Invite
Cathy?She
is
the
one
who
is
planning
the
whole
thing.
3.What
does
the
woman
mean?
A.Cathy
is
too
busy
to
come.
B.Cathy
is
going
to
be
invited.
C.Cathy
will
be
at
the
party.
答案:C
M:Did
you
say
you
were
driving
to
town
this
morning?
W:Yes.I
have
to
draw
some
money
from
the
bank
to
pay
my
bookstore
bills.
4.Why
does
the
woman
plan
to
go
to
town?
A.To
pay
her
bills
in
the
bank.
B.To
get
some
money
from
the
bank.
C.To
buy
books
in
a
bookstore.
答案:B
M:What
are
you
working
on
so
hard?
W:An
article
for
the
newspaper.If
I’m
late,it
won’t
get
printed
until
next
week.
5.What
is
the
woman
trying
to
do?
A.Print
an
article.
B.Finish
some
writing.
C.Find
a
newspaper.
答案:B
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6、7题。
M:Excuse
me.I
think
you
are
in
my
seat.
W:Sorry,but
it
says
7A
on
my
boarding
card.
M:Oh,um...right.I
asked
for
a
window
seat,you
see.
W:Yeah,so
did
I.What’s
your
seat
number?
M:Let’s
see.Oh,it’s
8A.
W:So
I
guess
you
are
in
the
seat
behind
me.
M:Oh,yes.Sorry
about
that.
6.What
is
the
man
doing?
A.Changing
seats
on
the
plane.
B.Asking
for
a
window
seat.
C.Trying
to
find
his
seat.
答案:C
7.What
is
the
woman’s
seat
number?
A.6A.　　　　　B.7A.　　　　　C.8A.
答案:B
听第7段材料,回答第8、9题。
M:Can
I
help
you?
W:Yes.How
much
are
these
T-shirts?
M:They
are
12
dollars
50
cents
each.
W:I
like
the
green
one,but
it
isn’t
big
enough.Have
you
got
a
larger
size?
M:Just
a
minute.No,I’m
sorry,we
haven’t.What
about
the
black
one?
W:No,it’s
too
dark.I
prefer
something
lighter,yellow
or
pink.
M:How
about
the
pink
one?
W:Yes.That’s
nice.I’ll
take
it.
M:That’s
12
dollars
50
cents
then,please.
W:Here
you
are.
8.Why
doesn’t
the
woman
take
the
green
T-shirt?
A.It’s
too
small.
B.It’s
too
dark.
C.It’s
too
expensive.
答案:A
9.What
does
the
woman
buy
in
the
end?
A.A
yellow
T-shirt.
B.A
blue
T-shirt.
C.A
pink
T-shirt.
答案:C
听第8段材料,回答第10至12题。
W:So
how
long
have
you
been
living
in
London?
M:Umm...a
couple
of
years.How
long
have
you
been
working
here?
W:Only
a
few
months.I
moved
down
here
for
the
job.There
was
no
work
for
me
where
I
came
from.
M:Where
did
you
come
from
then?
W:I
came
from
a
small
village
called
Arnside,near
Lancaster
a
year
ago.Umm...there
was
nothing
to
do
there,so
I
moved
to
London.
M:Do
you
enjoy
working
here
in
this
restaurant?
W:Very
much.
10.How
long
has
the
man
been
in
London?
A.One
year.
B.A
few
years.
C.A
couple
of
months.
答案:B
11.Why
did
the
woman
leave
her
home
town?
A.To
find
a
job.
B.To
lead
a
city
life.
C.To
open
a
restaurant.
答案:A
12.Where
did
the
woman
come
from?
A.London.
B.Arnside.
C.Lancaster.
答案:B
听第9段材料,回答第13至16题。
M:I’m
sure
you’ve
noticed
a
lot
of
things
that
are
different
about
our
school.
W:Oh,yes.In
the
United
States,we
don’t
have
to
carry
a
big
school
bag
with
us
like
you
do.
M:Why
is
that?
W:We
have
a
locker
of
our
own
which
is
a
small
box
with
a
lock.We
keep
textbooks
and
our
personal
things
in
it.I
just
bring
a
daypack
to
home.
M:A
daypack?
W:Yes.It’s
a
small
bag
that
you
carry
on
your
back.
M:What
do
you
carry
in
it?
W:My
notebooks
or
a
few
books
for
homework.
M:That’s
convenient.Is
there
anything
else
you’ve
noticed
about
our
school?
W:Yes.I
am
surprised
that
everyone
is
so
silent
in
class.
M:What
do
you
mean?
W:Well,we
usually
ask
questions
about
exams,homework
or
textbooks
on
the
first
day
of
the
school
year.The
teacher
likes
such
questions.
M:So
you
felt
it
different?
W:Yes.I
expected
to
see
a
lot
of
discussions
in
class
because
we
learn
that
way
in
the
United
States.
M:I
see.That
will
be
a
good
topic
for
our
school
newspaper
for
the
first
month
of
the
term.Nice
talking
with
you.See
you
around.Bye!
W:Bye!
13.What
is
a
daypack?
A.A
box.
B.A
lock.
C.A
bag.
答案:C
14.What
surprises
the
girl
at
school?
A.Few
students
asking
questions
in
class.
B.A
lot
of
discussions
in
class.
C.Teachers
giving
little
homework.
答案:A
15.At
what
time
of
the
school
term
does
the
conversation
most
probably
take
place?
A.At
the
end
of
it.
B.In
the
middle
of
it.
C.At
the
beginning
of
it.
答案:C
16.What
do
we
know
about
the
girl?
A.She
is
new
to
the
school.
B.She
writes
for
the
school
newspaper.
C.She
seldom
asks
questions
in
class.
答案:A
听第10段材料,回答第17至20题。
W:Good
morning,everybody!
Today
for
our
writing
class,we
are
glad
to
have
Mr
Henry
Stone
with
us,a
well-known
writer
in
this
country.He
is
going
to
share
with
us
his
writing
experiences.Now,Henry,please
tell
us
how
you
find
so
many
interesting
things
for
your
stories?
M:Okay.I
watch
people
a
lot.I
do
that
when
I
travel.I’ve
been
to
many
countries
such
as
Britain,Italy
and
Sweden,so
I
spend
a
lot
of
time
at
airports.While
waiting
for
my
flights,I
watch
people
passing
by
and
start
my
imagination.For
example,the
other
day
when
I
was
waiting
for
my
flight
to
Greece,I
saw
a
couple.They
were
buying
magazines
at
that
moment.They
were
not
wearing
business
clothes
but
the
man
was
carrying
a
suitcase.Every
few
seconds
the
woman
looked
around.I
wondered
if
someone
was
following
them.Perhaps
they
were
running
away
and....You
know,this
reminded
me
of
a
story
in
the
newspaper
that
day.A
bank
clerk
stole
one
million
pounds
a
week
before
and
disappeared
with
his
wife.There
was
a
picture
of
them
in
the
paper.The
couple
really
looked
like
the
thieves.Maybe
I
should
stop
them.Just
then,I
saw
them
say
goodbye
to
each
other,and
the
woman
walked
away.Well,sometimes
I
make
mistakes
like
that.But
I
find
things
like
that
very
useful.
17.What
does
Mr
Henry
Stone
do?
A.A
bank
clerk.
B.A
teacher.
C.A
writer.
答案:C
18.What
does
Henry
like
doing
at
airports?
A.Watching
people.
B.Telling
stories.
C.Reading
magazines.
答案:A
19.What
did
Henry
learn
from
the
newspaper
that
day?
A.A
valuable
suitcase
was
missing.
B.A
man
stole
money
from
a
bank.
C.A
woman
ran
away
from
home.
答案:B
20.Why
was
the
woman
at
the
airport?
A.She
was
traveling
on
business.
B.She
was
seeing
the
man
off.
C.She
was
leaving
for
Greece.
答案:B
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
It
was
1504,and
Columbus
was
making
another
trip
to
the
New
World.Columbus
and
his
men
needed
fresh
water
and
food
after
three
months
at
sea.They
saw
an
island
and
went
on
shore.On
the
island
there
were
unfriendly
Indians
who
refused
to
give
food
to
them.Columbus’
men
were
afraid
of
the
Indians,but
he
had
a
clever
plan.He
used
sign
language
to
tell
the
Indians
about
his
mysterious
(神秘的)
power
to
turn
off
the
light
in
the
sky.He
knew
about
a
lunar
eclipse
(月蚀)
the
next
night
because
the
information
was
in
his
almanac
(天文历书).Columbus
told
the
Indians,“Tomorrow
night
I’ll
turn
off
the
light
in
the
sky.”
But
they
didn’t
believe
him.When
the
eclipse
began
the
next
night,the
Indians
became
very
frightened.They
begged
Columbus
to
turn
on
the
light
again,and
they
quickly
gave
him
all
the
food
and
water
he
wanted.Immediately
Columbus
and
his
men
hurried
back
to
the
ship
and
sailed
away
in
the
moonless
night.
21.Why
did
Columbus
and
his
men
stop
at
the
island?
A.Because
they
wanted
to
meet
the
Indians
there.
B.Because
they
hoped
to
get
supplies
of
food
and
water.
C.Because
they
had
never
been
on
the
island
before.
D.Because
they
had
planned
to
visit
it.
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。根据“Columbus
and
his
men
needed
fresh
water
and
food
after
three
months
at
sea.”可推知他们停下来是希望对方能够给自己淡水和食物。
22.The
Indians
　　　Columbus
and
his
men.?
　　　　　
　
　　　
A.were
glad
to
see
B.were
kind
to
C.welcomed
D.were
not
kind
to
答案:D
解析:推理判断题。由“On
the
island
there
were
unfriendly
Indians
who
refused
to
give
food
to
them.”可知这儿的人们并不友好。
23.How
did
Columbus
tell
the
Indians
that
he
had
mysterious
power?
A.He
used
movements
of
hands
and
expressions
in
his
face.
B.He
spoke
in
the
language
of
the
Indians.
C.He
drew
a
lot
of
signs.
D.He
wrote
in
the
language
of
the
Indians.
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。由“He
used
sign
language
to
tell
the
Indians”可以得出答案。
24.The
Indians
gave
Columbus
food
and
water
because
they
　　　.?
A.believed
Columbus
was
a
man
with
mysterious
power
B.were
interested
in
Columbus’
trip
C.wanted
to
help
Columbus
D.were
clever
答案:A
解析:推理判断题。由印第安人最终把食物和淡水都给了哥伦布,并祈求他让月亮出来,可推知,他们认为哥伦布是个具有神奇力量的人。
B
People
who
like
travelling
have
their
reasons.They
believe
that
travelling
can
help
them
expand
their
field
of
view,especially
in
the
geographical
and
historical
sense.They
also
think
that
touring
will
give
them
more
chances
to
enjoy
different
kinds
of
food
and
experience
new
things
that
would
never
be
brought
by
other
activities.But
those
who
dislike
travelling
also
have
some
reasons.
Travelling,in
my
opinion,does
more
good
than
harm.Most
importantly,it
broadens(使扩大)our
mind.We
can
get
in
touch
with
other
civilizations(文明),cultures,customs
and
ideas.
Through
history,most
people
travelled
because
of
necessity(必要性)—not
for
pleasure.People
travelled
just
in
order
to
remain
alive.They
searched
for
food
to
eat
or
places
to
live
in.They
sometimes
ran
away
from
enemies.This
is
not
to
say
that
no
one
ever
travelled
just
for
fun
of
it.In
ancient
times,for
example,rich
Romans
travelled
all
the
way
to
Greece
to
take
part
in
the
Olympic
Games,and
festivals.Of
course,some
people
decided
to
travel
just
out
of
curiosity(好奇心).They
wanted
to
find
out
what
it
looked
like
beyond
the
horizon(地平线).Also
business
travel
has
been
going
on
for
centuries.Traders
could
not
only
make
money
but
also
learn
to
speak
several
languages
and
be
introduced
to
different
cultures.
So,travelling
does
enrich
our
mind
and
draw
new
ideas
to
us.There
is
no
doubt
that
we
can
get
much
from
it.
25.The
underlined
word“expand”in
Paragraph
1
can
be
replaced
by
“　　　”.?
A.widen
B.protect
C.lose
D.decide
答案:A
解析:词义猜测题。根据第二段出现的broadens(使扩大)及最后一段的enrich,可以推测这里的expand一词表示“扩大,拓宽”,与widen意思最接近。
26.According
to
the
passage,in
the
past
most
people
travelled
　　　.?
A.for
fun
B.for
knowledge
C.to
get
experiences
D.to
make
a
living
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。根据第三段可知在古代人们外出多是为了生计奔波。
27.How
many
reasons
for
travelling
are
mentioned
in
Paragraph
3?
A.Three.
B.Four.
C.Five.
D.Six.
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。第三段中作者提到了四种旅游的原因或动机,分别是:necessity,fun,curiosity和trade。
28.In
the
writer’s
opinion,travelling
can
be
　　　.?
A.expensive
B.funny
C.helpful
D.tiring
答案:C
解析:推理判断题。作者主要讲了旅游带来的种种好处,由第二段及最后一段都能看出他对旅游持积极肯定的态度,认为旅游很有益处。
C
Americans
spend
their
holidays
in
different
ways.Some
of
them
like
to
travel
abroad
and
get
to
know
something
about
the
foreign
countries.For
example,they
may
go
to
China
and
learn
about
its
old
traditions
and
habits.However,this
kind
of
trip
is
not
always
pleasant.First,it
is
not
so
convenient
and
second
the
service
they
receive
in
the
foreign
countries
is
not
quite
satisfactory.
Some
of
the
Americans
enjoy
travelling
within
their
own
states,usually
going
to
the
seaside
towns
or
cities
during
summer.They
may
stay
there
for
one
or
two
weeks
and
then
come
back
home.This
kind
of
trip
is
always
cheaper
and
pleasant.
Another
group
care
for
travelling
very
much.They
just
get
on
a
plane
in
the
morning
and
get
off
a
ship
in
the
evening.They
like
to
go
across
the
country,from
north
to
south,and
west
to
east.
For
the
last
group,they
just
want
to
stay
at
home
and
do
their
housework
with
the
radio
or
the
television
on.They
say
holiday
is
the
time
for
rest,not
for
travelling.
29.Some
Americans
like
to
travel
to
the
outside
because
　　　.?
A.their
own
country
has
nothing
interesting
B.the
outside
world
is
very
advanced
C.they
want
to
know
something
about
the
history
of
some
countries
D.they
have
a
lot
of
money
and
cannot
spend
them
all
in
their
own
country
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。由第一段第二句可知,有些人喜欢旅游,是想了解外国的一些情况。
30.There
is
something
that
the
foreigners
are
not
very
satisfied
with
when
they
travel
outside.It
is
　　　.?
A.the
food
B.the
habit
C.the
people
they
meet
D.the
service
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。由第一段最后一句可知,这些外出旅游的人不满意的地方是:他们得到的服务不令人满意。
31.If
an
American
wants
to
go
abroad
for
his
holiday,he
probably
goes
to
　　　to
learn
about
ancient
culture.?
A.Egypt
B.Australia
C.England
D.Canada
答案:A
解析:推理判断题。在四个选项中,只有A项(埃及)有悠久的历史文化。
32.Some
Americans
don’t
like
travelling
in
their
holidays,because
　　　.?
A.they
are
lazy
B.they
don’t
have
much
money
C.they
like
to
rest
at
home
D.they
like
watching
TV
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。由最后一段最后一句可以得出答案。
D
Mr
Brown
worked
in
a
factory
of
a
small
town.He
had
been
there
for
twenty
years
before
one
day
he
was
sent
to
the
capital
for
important
business.He
was
quite
excited
because
he
had
never
been
there
before.Before
he
set
off,he
asked
his
wife
and
three
daughters
if
they
wanted
him
to
buy
something
for
them
in
London.Mrs
Brown
began
to
think
it
over
and
then
she
said
she
wished
her
husband
would
be
able
to
buy
a
nice
umbrella
for
her,and
so
did
their
three
daughters.As
he
was
afraid
he
would
forget
it,he
drew
an
umbrella
on
his
hand.To
his
regret,he
lost
it
at
the
station.
On
the
train
Mr
Brown
sat
opposite
to
an
old
woman.The
woman’s
umbrella
was
so
nice
that
he
carefully
looked
at
it
and
said
to
himself
not
to
forget
to
buy
a
few
umbrellas
like
it.When
the
train
arrived
at
the
station
in
London,he
said
goodbye
to
the
old
woman,took
his
bag
and
her
umbrella
and
was
going
to
get
off.
“Wait
a
minute,sir,”shouted
the
old
woman.“That’s
my
umbrella!”
Now
Mr
Brown
noticed
that
he
had
taken
her
umbrella.His
face
turned
red
at
once
and
said
in
a
hurry,“Oh,I’m
very
sorry,madam!
I
didn’t
mean
it!”
Seven
days
later
Mr
Brown
left
the
capital.To
his
surprise,he
met
the
old
woman
and
sat
opposite
to
her
again.Looking
at
his
four
umbrellas,the
old
woman
was
satisfied
with
herself.“It
seems
that
I
was
luckier
than
the
other
four
women.”She
thought.
33.We
learn
from
the
passage
that
Mr
Brown
was
　　　.?
A.a
conductor
B.a
worker
C.a
thief
D.an
umbrella
maker
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。由第一段第一句“Mr
Brown
worked
in
a
factory
of
a
small
town.”可知,布朗先生是在一家小城镇的工厂里工作,故推知他是一名工人。
34.What
does
the
underlined
word
“it”
in
the
first
paragraph
refer
to?
A.His
ticket.
B.His
bag.
C.His
drawing.
D.His
umbrella.
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。此处的it用来指代上句中的he
drew
an
umbrella,即他画的那幅伞的画。
35.Why
did
Mr
Brown
take
the
woman’s
umbrella?
A.Because
he
was
lost
in
thought.
B.Because
it
was
much
like
his
own.
C.Because
he
thought
the
woman
didn’t
notice
it.
D.Because
the
woman
misplaced
it.
答案:A
解析:推理判断题。根据文章第二、三、四段可推知,布朗先生之所以拿着那位老太太的伞走,是因为他陷入了深思。
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
　36　
Being
angry
doesn’t
really
solve
much,but
what
people
do
when
they
feel
angry
is
important.The
goal
is
to
calm
yourself
down
and
try
to
solve
what
is
bothering
you.This
is
hard
for
some
kids
and
adults,too.Instead
of
calming
down,some
kids
might
keep
getting
more
and
more
upset
until
they
explode
like
a
volcano(像火山爆发)!?
　37　Their
anger
might
be
so
strong
that
they
lose
control
of
their
temper.They
may
act
in
ways
unacceptable
and
hurtful.People
may
say
that
someone
has
trouble
controlling
their
temper.　38　?
Some
kids
might
get
so
angry
that
they
scream
at
their
parents,break
something,or
even
worse,hit
their
brothers
or
sisters.　39　However,it’s
not
OK
for
a
kid
to
do
any
of
those
things.Kids
don’t
want
to
act
in
this
way,but
sometimes
angry
feelings
can
be
hard
to
manage.So
what
to
do??
Well,the
good
news
is
that
kids
don’t
just
have
to
keep
making
the
same
mistakes
over
and
over
again.　40　Imagine
your
temper
as
a
puppy(幼犬)inside
you
that
needs
some
training.The
puppy
is
not
bad—it
will
probably
turn
out
a
great
dog.It
just
needs
to
learn
some
rules
because,right
now,that
puppy
is
causing
some
problems
to
you.?
A.You
can
train
your
temper.
B.You
don’t
want
to
cause
trouble.
C.Kids
should
be
allowed
to
express
their
feelings,even
angry
ones.
D.Everybody
gets
angry
sometimes.
E.In
fact,they
usually
mean
that
a
kid
behaves
badly
when
feeling
angry.
F.Instead
of
thinking
of
the
person
you’re
angry
with,think
of
something
else.
G.Some
kids
get
angry
more
often
or
more
easily
than
some
other
kids.
答案:36~40
DGECA
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
I
went
there
in
1924;no
local
planes
in
those
days,so
I
made
the
trip
by
bus.It
was
a
thousand
kilometers,and
it
　41　
twenty
hours.I
sat
by
a
man
about
my
own
age,24.He
said
his
name
was
Karl
Packey,but
he
told
me
　42　
anything
else.?
He
disappointed
me
because
he
had
so
little
to
say.No
opinions,no
memories,no
stories
to
　43　.Had
his
home,his
life,the
war
and
so
on
left
no
mark
at
all
on
him?It
was
very
　44　.I
was
glad
when
the
pillows
were
given
　45　,and
I
could
politely
try
to
sleep.I
hoped
I
would
never
meet
him
again.The
next
time
I
went
to
Fairburn
was
in
1974.By
　46　,of
course.The
president
was
going
to
“open”
the
new
town,　47　
had
taken
twenty-six
years
to
be
built.I
sat
next
to
a
man
of
about
fifty,whose
face
was
a
　48　.I
guessed
he
had
something
　49　
to
tell
me.?
The
face
was
rough,brown
and
　50　
with
age
and
worry.There
were
two
old
scars
(伤痕)
in
his
face.But
　51　
them,I
saw
　52　
and
power.I
guessed
he
was
the
boss
of
　53　.Perhaps
he
hadn’t
expected
the
big
job
and
hadn’t
wanted
it.?
He
had
done
it
well,no
doubt.The
thing
had
clearly
　54　
him
the
power
of
decision.We
started
to
talk...The
next
two
hours
were
for
me
the
most
interesting,adventurous,even
exciting
that
I
remember.He
kept
me
silent,　55　
with
wonder.Our
plane
　56　
Fairburn.I
　57　
his
hand
and
thanked
him
for
making
the
journey
so
　58　.I
told
him
my
name.“The
pleasure
was
　59　,”
he
said,“I
was
Chief
Engineer
here
at
Fairburn
until
last
year.I
built
the
new
town.Karl
Packer
is
the
name.Haven’t
we
met
before
　60　?”?
41.A.took
B.spent
C.lost
D.had
答案:A
解析:It
takes
some
time是固定搭配,意为“花费一段时间”。
42.A.hardly
B.almost
C.nearly
D.mostly
答案:A
解析:由下一段第一句中的“he
had
so
little
to
say”可知,他说话很少。
43.A.say
B.speak
C.tell
D.talk
答案:C
解析:表示“讲故事”应用动词tell。
44.A.puzzling
B.interesting
C.exciting
D.wondering
答案:A
解析:这让“我”很是困惑。
45.A.in
B.up
C.out
D.with
答案:C
解析:give
out意为“分发”。
46.A.bus
B.land
C.air
D.sea
答案:C
解析:根据语境可知,作者应是乘飞机。
47.A.it
B.that
C.which
D.this
答案:C
解析:which引导非限制性定语从句。
48.A.book
B.mirror
C.picture
D.window
答案:A
解析:从作者在这人的脸上所看到的一切可知,这人的脸上就如同一本书籍。
49.A.good
B.bad
C.wrong
D.old
答案:B
解析:由下文第一句的“The
face
was
rough,brown...”可以得出答案。
50.A.cleaned
B.washed
C.lined
D.broken
答案:C
解析:此处用lined表示此人的脸上布满皱纹。
51.A.on
B.above
C.over
D.in
答案:C
解析:此处指作者通过这两个伤疤,看到更多的东西。
52.A.success
B.sadness
C.fear
D.failure
答案:A
解析:由power可以想到success。
53.A.something
B.anything
C.nothing
D.everything
答案:A
解析:the
boss
of
something表示“某方面的老板”。
54.A.taught
B.offered
C.gave
D.showed
答案:A
解析:teach
sb
sth的含义是“教会某人某事”,本句中表示“这件事情教会他做出决定的能力”。
55.A.open-mouth
B.opened-mouth
C.open-mouthed
D.opening-mouth
答案:C
解析:open-mouthed表示“口若悬河”。
56.A.landed
at
B.landed
in
C.landed
to
D.landed
答案:A
解析:由第47空前的the
new
town可知,Fairburn是个小城镇,因此应用land
at。
57.A.hit
B.shook
C.seized
D.caught
答案:B
解析:shake
one’s
hand意为“与某人握手”。
58.A.pleasant
B.pleasure
C.pleased
D.pleasing
答案:A
解析:pleasant表示“令人愉快的”。
59.A.my
B.mine
C.me
D.I
答案:B
解析:mine=my
pleasure。
60.A.somewhere
B.anywhere
C.nowhere
D.everywhere
答案:A
解析:somewhere表示“某个地方”,此处表示“难道我们以前没在某个地方见过吗”?
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
I’m
very
glad
to
hear
that
you
are
going
to
have
a
journey
to
Australia.I
have
read
a
good
book
about
it
and
I
want
to
recommend
(推荐)
61.　　　　　　
to
you.The
book
62.
(write)
by
Lee
Mylne
was
first
published
(出版)
in
November,2008.Many
things
about
Australia
63.　　　　　　　　　　
(talk)
about
in
this
book.From
it
you’ll
know
much
about
Australia.Take
sports
64.　　　　　　
example.People
65.　　　　　　
live
there
like
outdoor
sports
such
as
surfing,66.　　　　　　　　　
(swim),cycling
and
so
on.When
it
67.　　　　　　
(come)
to
animals,kangaroos
are
the
unique
(独特的)
animals
of
this
land.Many
famous
68.　　　　　　
(place)
are
also
introduced
in
the
book.The
price
of
the
book
is
100
yuan,69.　　　　　　
it
is
60
yuan
through
online
shopping,which
will
save
you
40
yuan.?
I’m
sure
with
the
help
of
this
book,you
70.
(know)
Australia
better
during
the
two-week
journey.
答案:61.it　62.written　63.are
talked　64.for　65.who/that　66.swimming　67.comes　68.places　69.but　70.will
know
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
Dear
Mary,
I
receive
your
email
yesterday.Don’t
worry
about
me.I’m
getting
on
well
with
my
research
in
the
lab.But
to
my
great
surprise,you
say
you
will
give
up
learn
English.The
reason
is
that
you
have
not
done
well
recently
but
lost
interest.I’m
afraid
I
can’t
agree
with
you.I
know
it
is
difficulty
to
learn
English,but
English
is
wide
used
in
the
world
today.It
will
be
important
tool
in
our
future
work.Beside,it
is
becoming
more
and
more
important
in
your
daily
life.If
you
study
hard,you
will
be
succeed.Please
remember
where
there
is
a
will,there
is
a
way.
I’m
looking
forward
to
hear
good
news
from
you.
Yours,
Li
Hua
答案:第一句:receive→received
第四句:learn→learning
第五句:but→and
第七句:difficulty→difficult;wide→widely
第八句:在be后加an
第九句:Beside→Besides;your→our
第十句:去掉will后的be
第十二句:hear→hearing
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
根据下列表格内容,写一则旅行日记。
时间
7月5日,星期六,天气晴朗
地点
天涯海角(Ultima
Thule)
抵达方式
乘校车
出发时间
上午七点二十分
续表
到达时间
上午九点半
活动内容
上午:在沙滩上做游戏,在饭店吃午饭
下午:英语讲故事比赛,颁奖,照相
返回时间
下午五点半
注意:1.表格中所列内容不得遗漏,意思连贯,表达清楚。
2.日记的开头和结尾已给出,不计入总词数。
3.词数:100左右。
Saturday,July
5th
Fine
Today
we
went
on
an
organized
trip
to
Ultima
Thule.
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
What
a
good
trip
we
had
today!I’ll
never
forget
it.
参考范文:
Saturday,July
5thFine?
Today
we
went
on
an
organized
trip
to
Ultima
Thule.We
set
out
in
the
school
bus
at
7:20
am.The
weather
was
pleasant,which
made
us
excited.After
about
two
hours’
ride,we
arrived
there
at
nine
thirty.We
played
games
on
the
sands
and
swam
in
the
river
happily.After
that,we
had
lunch
in
a
restaurant.In
the
afternoon
we
held
a
contest
of
telling
stories
in
English,which
turned
out
to
be
quite
a
success.Six
winners
were
given
beautiful
prizes
and
I
was
lucky
to
be
among
them.A
good
many
photos
were
taken
there.Time
passed
quickly
and
we
had
to
leave.It
was
at
half
past
five
that
we
returned
safely.?
What
a
good
trip
we
had
today!I’ll
never
forget
it.?第一单元测评
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
M:Hi,have
you
finished
your
lesson?
W:Not
yet.Is
there
something
wrong?
M:Well,I
want
to
catch
the
last
bus
home,but
I
need
to
lock
the
doors
on
this
floor
before
I
leave,so...
1.What
does
the
man
need
to
do
now?
A.Lock
the
doors.
B.Catch
the
last
train.
C.Finish
his
lesson.
W:He
chose
a
terrible
location
for
his
new
bar.It
will
probably
shut
down.
M:It
all
depends.Advertising
might
help.
2.Why
does
the
woman
say
the
bar
would
shut
down?
A.Because
of
its
location.
B.Because
of
its
advertisements.
C.Because
of
its
management.
M:I
would
like
a
cup
of
coffee
and
some
dessert.
W:Some
sugar
in
your
coffee,sir?
M:No,thanks.Do
you
have
free
wireless
Internet?
W:Yes,we
have.
3.What
does
the
man
want
to
do?
A.Have
a
cup
of
tea.
B.Go
online.
C.Look
at
the
menu.
W:OK.I’ve
got
a
new
map.Let’s
check
the
route
from
here
to
the
airport.
M:Where
are
we?Oh,here
we
are.So
we
need
to
drive
on
the
A120
and
then
turn
left.
W:No,we’ll
need
to
turn
right.We’re
coming
from
that
direction,remember?
4.Where
will
the
speakers
finally
go?
A.To
the
A120.　B.To
the
airport.　C.To
their
home.
W:How
do
you
feel
about
the
concert?Do
you
think
it
will
be
a
success?
M:Oh,yes.The
guys
and
I
have
been
working
on
this
show
for
the
last
three
months.
5.How
does
the
man
feel?
A.Confident.
B.Impatient.
C.Worried.
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6、7题。
W:Shall
we
go
to
watch
the
volleyball
game
tonight?
M:Yes,but
which
teams
are
playing?
W:China
National
Team
against
the
Russian
Team.
M:If
I
remember
correctly,the
two
teams
have
played
with
each
other
quite
often
before
in
international
games.
W:You’re
right,and
I
have
noticed
that
the
scores
have
been
very
close,although
our
team
was
often
beaten.
M:I
bet
they’ll
have
another
close
match
tonight.
6.What
will
the
speakers
do
tonight?
A.Play
a
game.
B.Watch
a
match.
C.Visit
a
volleyball
player.
7.What
does
the
man
think
of
the
result?
A.China
will
lose.
B.Russia
will
lose.
C.It
will
be
a
close
match.
听第7段材料,回答第8至10题。
W:I’m
sorry,your
laundry
hasn’t
come
back
yet.
M:But
I
brought
it
in
half
a
month
ago.
W:I
know,but
there’s
been
a
problem
at
the
factory
and
everything’s
delayed.
M:Well,I
trust
my
suit
is
ready.Here
is
the
ticket.
W:I’ll
go
and
check
for
you...Yes,your
suit
is
ready.Here
it
is.
M:Oh,good.But
look,that
big
dirty
spot
I
told
you
about
is
still
there.
W:Well,I
don’t
think
they
can
remove
it.It’s
in
the
material.
M:What
kind
of
excuse
is
that?You
should
have
told
me
before.
W:I’m
sorry,sir.You
can
send
it
back
if
you
like.But
it’ll
take
a
week.
M:A
week?But
I
need
it
for
Saturday
evening.No,I’ll
take
it
now.How
much
is
it?
W:Ten
dollars.
M:Ten
dollars?For
that?No
way,you
can’t
expect
me
to
pay
that
much.
8.Where
does
the
conversation
take
place?
A.At
the
cleaner’s.
B.In
a
restaurant.
C.In
a
clothes
shop.
9.When
will
the
man
need
to
use
the
suit?
A.On
Saturday
evening.
B.One
week
later.
C.Half
a
month
later.
10.How
does
the
man
sound
in
the
end?
A.Satisfied.
B.Angry.
C.Sorry.
听第8段材料,回答第11至13题。
M:Do
you
think
it
is
necessary
for
me
to
prepare
some
topics
to
talk
about
at
English
Corner?
W:Yes,because
it
is
the
first
time
that
you
have
been
going
there.You
should
prepare
something
in
case
you
are
too
nervous.But
after
three
or
four
times,you
won’t
have
to
do
that
anymore.
M:Why
not?
W:If
you
prepare
some
topics
in
advance,your
conversation
at
the
corner
will
always
be
limited
by
the
sentences
you
have
prepared.If
someone
asks
you
a
question
outside
of
them,you’ll
have
nothing
to
say.So
remember
not
to
become
too
dependent
on
what
you’ve
prepared.
M:What
if
I
can’t
understand
people’s
questions?
W:That
happens
to
everyone
at
English
Corner.So
don’t
worry.You
can
always
ask
them
to
repeat
the
question.
M:Won’t
it
be
embarrassing
if
I
still
can’t
understand?
W:It’ll
be
OK.If
it
happens,the
person
will
try
to
explain
the
question
to
you
in
another
way.
11.What
will
happen
if
the
man
always
prepares
topics
for
English
Corner?
A.He’ll
have
good
conversations
with
others.
B.He’ll
be
limited
by
what
he
has
prepared.
C.He’ll
become
even
more
nervous.
12.What’s
the
man’s
concern?
A.He
can’t
understand
people’s
questions.
B.He
has
nothing
to
say.
C.People
may
not
understand
him.
13.What
is
the
woman
like?
A.Patient.
B.Strict.
C.Humorous.
听第9段材料,回答第14至16题。
M:When
you
are
in
a
restaurant
and
you
want
the
waiter
to
bring
you
the
bill,what
do
you
do
to
attract
his
attention?
W:I
just
make
eye-contact
with
him
and
nod
my
head.Then
I
ask
him
when
he
comes
to
the
table.Why
do
you
ask?
M:I
went
out
with
my
friends
to
a
nice
restaurant
last
night.I
noticed
that
many
people
shouted
for
the
bill.
W:That
seems
a
little
impolite
for
such
a
fancy
restaurant.
M:That’s
what
I
thought.Anyway,what
did
you
do
yesterday
evening?
W:Well,it
was
warm,so
I
went
outside.I
walked
along
the
river
for
a
couple
of
miles.Actually,quite
a
few
other
people
had
the
same
idea.I
ran
into
Jack
there.
M:You
did?How
is
he
these
days?
W:He
seemed
okay.We
didn’t
stop
and
chat
because
we
were
on
opposite
banks
of
the
river.We
just
waved
at
each
other.
14.How
does
the
woman
ask
for
the
bill
in
a
restaurant?
A.By
shouting
at
the
waiter.
B.By
nodding
to
the
waiter.
C.By
ringing
a
bell.
15.What
did
the
woman
do
yesterday
evening?
A.She
chatted
online.
B.She
ate
out.
C.She
took
a
walk.
16.What
do
we
know
about
her
meeting
with
Jack?
A.They
just
waved
at
each
other.
B.They
talked
for
a
long
time.
C.They
walked
back
home
together.
听第10段材料,回答第17至20题。
It
was
the
first
day
of
our
two-week
family
vacation
to
Europe.A
year
ago
when
my
mom’s
50th
birthday
was
coming,she
said
to
us,“What
about
travelling
in
Europe?”
She
wasn’t
interested
in
parties,new
cars
or
celebrations.She
wanted
to
travel.
Of
course,my
brother
Michael
and
I
were
excited
when
she
put
forward
the
idea.Michael,23,was
finishing
up
an
engineering
degree.And
I
had
already
borrowed
a
lot
of
money
for
my
college
education.We
weren’t
going
to
be
able
to
have
a
trip
like
this
on
our
own
for
quite
some
time.Obviously,we
thought
this
was
the
best
idea
our
mother
had
ever
had.
But
we
received
phone
calls
and
emails
from
my
mother
every
day
as
the
date
of
travelling
was
near.“Don’t
forget
to
make
copies
of
your
passports.”
“Make
sure
to
call
the
bank.”
“And
seriously,Cara,pack
sweaters.You’re
going
to
be
cold.”
It
had
been
seven
years
after
I
left
home.And
except
during
the
holidays,my
brother
and
I
hadn’t
spent
much
time
together
with
our
family
for
a
long
time.
17.How
long
was
the
family
vacation?
A.Two
weeks.
B.One
week.
C.Four
days.
18.What
did
the
speaker’s
mother
like?
A.Parties.
B.New
cars.
C.Travelling.
19.What
was
Michael’s
job
at
that
time?
A.An
engineer.
B.A
teacher.
C.A
student.
20.What
did
the
mother
ask
Cara
to
pack?
A.Umbrellas.
B.Sweaters.
C.Food.
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
In
Europe,many
people
make
friends
between
their
countries
through
town
twinning.Town
or
city
twinning
means
two
towns
in
different
countries
agree
and
decide
to
become
“twins”
with
a
sister
city
relationship.
The
people
find
pen
friends
in
the
twin
town.They
exchange
newspapers
and
stamps.The
school
teachers
discuss
teaching
methods
with
the
teachers
in
the
twin
town.Officials
visit
the
twin
town
for
celebrations.Ordinary
people
travel
to
the
twin
town,too,but
not
very
often
if
it
is
far
away.
Sometimes,schools
even
exchange
their
classes
for
two
or
three
weeks!For
example,German
middle
school
students
study
for
a
while
at
the
school
in
their
twin
town
in
Britain,staying
with
British
families.A
few
months
later,their
British
friends
come
to
study
in
Germany.
Many
British
towns
are
so
pleased
with
the
results
of
the
twinning
that
they
set
out
to
find
more
than
one
twin
town!
Tonbridge,a
small
town
in
Kent,for
example,has
twin
town
in
both
Germany
and
France.Richmond
near
London
has
relationships
with
Germany,France
and
even
a
town
in
a
Balkan
country!
Town
twinning
can
help
make
friends.It
helps
students
improve
their
language
skills,and
also
helps
people
to
understand
the
differences
between
nations.
21.Twin
towns
develop
　　　.?
A.between
European
countries
and
China
B.in
the
English-speaking
countries
only
C.in
the
same
country
D.between
different
countries
22.How
many
countries
are
mentioned
in
the
passage?
A.4.　　　　　　　　　　B.5.
C.6.
D.7.
23.One
of
the
advantages
of
town
twinning
is
　　　.?
A.to
earn
more
money
B.to
set
up
schools
C.to
improve
students’
language
skills
D.to
develop
industry
and
agriculture
24.Which
is
the
best
title
for
the
passage?
A.Town
Twinning
B.Friendly
Towns
C.Exchanging
Teachers
and
Students
D.Peace
and
Understanding
B
Today’s
post
is
almost
about
signs
in
English.You
will
see
signs
on
the
road
while
driving
or
when
walking
down
a
street.Now
let’s
take
a
closer
look
at
the
signs
in
the
picture
below,so
you
can
fully
understand
what
they
mean
in
case
you
come
across
one
of
them.
Starting
with
the
top
row,we
have
a:
Yield
sign
—
This
sign
indicates
(标示)
that
you
need
to
slow
down,but
you
may
not
have
to
come
to
a
full
stop.
Crosswalk
—
This
is
a
sign
that
indicates
people
have
the
right
of
way
to
cross
the
street,so
cars
have
to
stop
when
they
see
a
person
waiting
next
to
one
of
these
signs.
Second
row:
Do
not
enter
—
This
sign
indicates
you
are
not
allowed
to
enter
a
road
at
that
point.
Buckle
up(系好安全带)!—
There
are
often
signs
on
roads
in
the
United
States
reminding
people
that
wearing
seat
belts(安全带)
is
mandatory
(强制的)
(seat
belt
laws
differ
depending
on
what
state
you
are
in,but
all
US
states
have
seat
belt
laws).
Third
row:
Be
alert
(警惕的)
for
bears
—
This
is
another
sign
that
is
used
to
indicate
to
drivers
and
pedestrians
(行人)
that
they
should
be
alert
for
wildlife
in
the
area.
Playground—This
is
the
sign
used
to
alert
drivers
that
there
is
a
playground
nearby,so
it
is
a
good
idea
to
slow
down
and
watch
for
children.?
25.Where
can
you
often
see
the
signs?
A.In
a
factory.
B.On
a
farm.
C.On
the
road.
D.In
the
class.
26.What
would
you
do
when
you
see
Yield
sign?
A.Slow
down.
B.Enter
a
road
at
that
point.
C.Have
to
come
to
a
full
stop.
D.Should
be
alert
for
wildlife
in
the
area.
27.What
can
be
learned
from
the
passage?
A.US
states
have
the
same
law
about
seat
belts.
B.All
the
people
in
a
car
should
buckle
up
in
US.
C.Pedestrians
should
walk
slowly
at
a
crosswalk.
D.Drivers
should
stop
the
car
at
the
sign
of
playground.
28.What
does
the
underlined
phrase
“watch
for”
in
the
last
line
mean?
A.See.
B.Look
at.
C.Look
for.
D.Pay
attention
to.
C
At
Harton
College—an
English
boarding
(寄宿)
school
for
boys,there
are
many
rules.Fifteen-year-old
Bob
Sanders
often
breaks
them.
The
boys
can
go
into
the
town
in
the
afternoon
after
class.But
they
must
return
to
the
school
at
six
o’clock.One
afternoon
Bob
walked
to
the
town.He
looked
at
the
shops
and
then
went
to
the
cinema.After
the
film,he
looked
at
his
watch.It
was
after
eight
o’clock.He
was
a
little
worried.He
walked
back
to
Harton
College
as
fast
as
possible.
When
he
arrived,he
ran
quickly
to
the
main
entrance.It
was
locked.He
went
round
the
school
building
to
another
door.That
one
was
locked,too.He
looked
up
at
the
window
of
his
dormitory.It
was
on
the
third
floor.The
window
was
open.But
it
was
quite
dark
and
he
could
not
climb
up
the
wall
easily.Then
he
saw
another
open
window
on
the
ground
floor.It
was
the
window
of
the
headmaster’s
study.
He
looked
into
the
room—no
one
was
there.Bob
quickly
climbed
on
to
the
window
and
jumped
into
the
room.Just
then
he
heard
a
noise.Then
someone
turned
on
a
light
in
the
corridor(走廊).Bob
looked
around
and
then
hid
under
the
sofa.One
minute
later,Mr
Mannering,the
headmaster,came
in.He
turned
on
the
light
on
his
desk,and
sat
down
on
the
sofa.Then
he
opened
a
book
and
began
to
read.
Bob
lay
under
the
sofa
as
quietly
as
possible.He
couldn’t
move.The
floor
was
cold
and
uncomfortable.He
looked
at
the
headmaster’s
shoes
and
socks
for
an
hour.
“Why
doesn’t
he
get
up
and
go
to
bed?”
Bob
thought.
Mr.Mannering
read
his
book
for
another
hour.Finally,the
headmaster
closed
his
book
and
stood
up.He
put
the
book
on
a
shelf
and
walked
towards
the
door.
“Thank
God
he
didn’t
find
me
under
the
sofa,”
thought
Bob.
Then
Mr.Mannering
stopped
and
spoke
towards
the
sofa.
“Would
you
turn
off
the
light
when
you
leave?”
He
said,and
left
the
study.
29.Bob
returned
to
the
school
more
than
two
hours
late
because
　　　.?
A.he
enjoyed
himself
too
much
B.he
did
not
catch
the
bus
C.he
hated
the
rules
D.he
ran
into
an
old
friend
30.When
Bob
looked
up
at
the
window
of
his
dormitory,Bob
couldn’t
go
to
his
dormitory
because
　　　.?
A.the
door
was
locked
B.the
window
was
shut
C.it
was
quite
dark
D.the
wall
was
too
high
for
him
to
climb
up
31.It’s
obvious
that
　　　.?
A.the
headmaster
didn’t
notice
Bob
B.the
headmaster
found
Bob
under
the
sofa
C.the
headmaster
thought
a
thief
had
broken
into
his
study
D.there
was
a
third
man
in
the
study
32.From
this
passage
we
know
that
the
headmaster
is
　　　.?
A.kind
B.strict
C.wise
D.humorous
D
A
friend
is
better
than
fortune(财富).
A
friend
may
be
worse
than
poison
in
some
cases(情况).
The
two
sentences
above
have
opposite(相反的)
meanings
and
seem
to
be
unreasonable(不合情理的),but
they
can
be
explained
as
follows(如下):the
first
means
all
good
friends
who
drive
us
towards
good
while
the
second
means
all
bad
ones
who
lead
us
into
bad
ways.
My
ideal(理想的)
friend
is
of
course
a
good
friend
whose
goodness
is
shown
below:He
has
no
bad
habits,such
as
smoking
and
drinking.He
lives
a
simple(简朴的)
life.He
studies
hard
so
as
not
to
waste
his
golden
time.At
home
he
honours(尊敬)
his
parents
and
loves
his
brothers;at
school
he
honours
his
teachers
and
shares
the
feelings
of
his
classmates.He
treats(对待)
those
truly
who
are
true
to
him.In
a
word,he
has
all
the
good
characteristics(品质)
that
I
don’t
have.With
his
help
I
can
be
free
from
all
difficulties.
Indeed,if
I
have
such
a
person
as
my
friend,I
shall
never
fear
difficulties
and
I
shall
never
know
the
existence(存在)
of
the
word
“failure”.
33.This
passage
tells
us
　　　.?
A.how
to
make
friends
with
others
B.how
to
help
friends
C.what
kind
of
person
the
writer’s
friend
is
D.what
kind
of
person
we
should
make
friends
with
34.According
to
the
writer,an
ideal
friend
means
　　　.?
A.a
friend
without
bad
habits
B.a
famous
man
C.a
perfect(完美的)
man
D.a
respectable
man
35.The
correct
Chinese
meaning
of
the
word
“poison”
is
“　　　”.?
A.监狱
B.人物
C.毒药
D.职位
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
How
to
Make
Friends
Friendship
is
a
very
important
human
relationship
and
everyone
needs
good
friends.Good
friendship
has
many
benefits.It
offers
companionship,improves
self-worth
and
promotes
good
health.There
are
times
in
our
lives
such
as
when
we
have
recently
moved
into
a
new
town,or
changed
our
jobs
or
schools.Such
changes
often
leave
us
without
a
friend.　36　
But
for
many
of
us
the
process
is
difficult
and
requires
courage.Below
are
some
helpful
suggestions
on
how
to
make
and
keep
friends.?
1.Associate
with
others.
The
first
step
to
make
friends
is
associating
with
other
people.You
can
go
to
public
places
to
meet
new
people.Besides,you
will
need
to
make
yourself
known
by
becoming
an
active
member
of
such
places.
2.Start
a
conversation.
Starting
a
conversation
is
the
second
most
important
step
in
making
new
friends.　37　
You
can
always
start
the
conversation.Being
able
to
make
small
talk
is
a
very
useful
skill
in
relating
with
other
people.?
3.　38　?
Choosing
friends
with
common
interests
is
important
in
building
friendship
as
these
interests
would
always
bring
you
and
your
friend
together.Hanging
out
will
always
be
a
pleasant
experience.
4.Let
it
grow.
It
is
a
good
thing
to
stay
in
touch.However,try
not
to
press
your
new
friend
with
calls,messages
or
visits
as
this
would
likely
wear
him
or
her
out
and
finally
you
may
lose
your
friend.　39　
The
best
friendships
are
the
ones
that
grow
naturally.?
5.Enjoy
your
friendship.
The
best
way
to
enjoy
your
friendship
is
to
allow
your
friends
to
be
themselves.　40　
Try
not
to
change
them
from
who
they
are
to
what
you
want
them
to
be.Become
the
kind
of
friend
you
will
want
your
friend
to
be
to
you.?
A.Be
cheerful.
B.Do
things
together.
C.Do
not
wait
to
be
spoken
to.
D.Try
not
to
find
fault
with
your
friends.
E.Making
new
friends
comes
easy
for
some
people.
F.For
a
friendship
to
develop
you
need
to
stay
in
touch.
G.So
you
will
need
to
give
your
friend
time
to
react
to
you.
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
My
little
daughter,you
are
teaching
me
how
selfless(无私)
real
love
is!
My
wife
called,“How
long
will
you
be
with
that
　41　?Will
you
come
here
and
make
your
darling
daughter
eat
her
food?”
I
threw
the
paper
away
and
　42　
to
the
place.My
daughter,Sindu,sat
there,tears
welling
up
in
her
eyes.In
front
of
her
was
a
big
bowl
of
rice.?
I
　43　
the
bowl
and
persuaded:“Sindu,why
not
take
a
few
mouthfuls
of
the
rice?”?
“OK,Dad.I
will
eat
—
not
just
a
few
mouthfuls,　44　
the
whole
lot
of
this.But...”
Sindu
hesitated.“Dad,if
I
eat
the
whole
rice,will
you
give
me
　45　
I
ask
for?”?
“Promise.”
I
　46　.?
After
eating
the
rice
painfully,Sindu
came
to
me,her
eyes
wide
with
　47　.Now
I
became
a
bit
　48　.“Dear,you
shouldn’t
insist
on
　49　
a
computer
or
any
such
　50　
things.Dad
does
not
have
that
kind
of
money
right
now.”
　51　,“I
want
to
have
my
head
shaved
off(剃掉),this
Sunday!”
was
her
requirement,which
was
far
　52　
my
belief.?
On
Monday
morning,I
　53　
Sindu
at
her
school
and
watched
her
walking
towards
her
classroom.She
turned
around
and
　54　.I
waved
back
with
a
smile.Just
then,a
boy,who
just
got
out
of
a
car,shouted,“Sindu,please
wait
for
me!”
What
　55　
me
was
the
hairless
head
of
that
boy.?
“Sir,your
daughter
is
　56　
indeed!”
Without
introducing
herself,a
lady
standing
beside
me
continued,“That
boy
is
my
son,who
lost
all
his
　57　
because
of
a
disease.He
　58　
to
come
back
to
school
for
fearing
the
unintentional(无意的)but
　59　
teasing(取笑)of
the
schoolmates.Sindu
visited
him
last
week,and
promised
him
that
she
would
take
care
of
the
teasing
problem.But,I
　60　
imagined
she
would
cut
her
lovely
hair
for
my
son!”?
41.A.bowl　　　　　　　　　B.newspaper
C.book
D.food
42.A.rushed
B.pulled
C.jumped
D.shouted
43.A.took
out
B.picked
up
C.broke
down
D.gave
out
44.A.and
B.so
C.or
D.but
45.A.what
B.where
C.which
D.how
46.A.moved
B.doubted
C.agreed
D.talked
47.A.expectation
B.confidence
C.worry
D.attention
48.A.nervous
B.bored
C.excited
D.relaxed
49.A.making
B.selling
C.getting
D.studying
50.A.valuable
B.useful
C.wonderful
D.expensive
51.A.Therefore
B.However
C.Besides
D.Anyway
52.A.to
B.beyond
C.of
D.within
53.A.met
B.helped
C.dropped
D.collected
54.A.shouted
B.hoped
C.waved
D.stared
55.A.interested
B.frightened
C.pleased
D.surprised
56.A.careful
B.hard-working
C.sad
D.great
57.A.friends
B.hair
C.hope
D.face
58.A.refused
B.wished
C.dreamed
D.decided
59.A.kind
B.hurtful
C.harmless
D.funny
60.A.usually
B.ever
C.never
D.nearly
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
I
am
very
happy
to
receive
your
letter.I’m
glad
61.(hear)
that
you
will
come
to
my
city
and
stay
with
us
for
a
few
weeks.62.　　　　　(I)
house
(is)
on
the
Heaven
Street
with
five
rooms,and
one
63.
them
is
living
room,two
bed
rooms,the
other
two
are
kitchen
and
bathroom.I
have
cleaned
a
guest
room
64.　　　　　
you.There
65.　　　　　(be)
a
bed,a
sofa
and
three
chairs
in
this
25
square-meter
room.If
this
room
is
not
suitable
enough,please
write
to
me
66.
I
will
prepare
another
one
for
you.There
is
67.　　　　　
bus
stop
near
my
house,and
you
can
take
Number
1
bus
to
the
cinema
and
Number
2
to
the
supermarket.If
you
have
other
requests(要求),please
feel
68.　　　　　(freely)
to
write
to
me.I
will
try
my
69.　　　　　(good)
to
meet
your
needs.I
wish
you
can
come
soon
and
have
good
70.　　　　　(day)
here.?
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文,文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
Dear
Jin
Jing,
Your
problem
is
common
one
among
middle
school
students.Maybe
the
following
advices
can
help
you.First
in
all,believe
in
yourself.Your
greatest
problem
is
that
you
lack
self-confidence.The
first
thing
you
must
do
it
is
to
smile
at
your
classmates.One
smile
speaks
loud
about
your
wish
to
make
friends
than
any
word.Your
smile
will
show
that
you
are
friendly
to
him.Next,trying
talking
with
a
student
who
is
as
shy
as
you
or
who
share
the
same
interests
with
you.You
can
discuss
your
studies
with
a
classmate
and
you
can
also
talk
about
your
hobbies.Unless
anyone
is
in
trouble,you
should
be
ready
to
help
him
or
her.Once
you
have
confidence,you
can
make
as
many
friends
as
possibly.
Yours,
Lily
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
假如你叫李华。你的好朋友简最近发现自己在发胖,很苦恼。她写信请你给她就如何避免这一情况提建议。请你根据下面的内容给简写一封信,词数100左右。
要想减肥,应做到以下三点:
1.要保证健康饮食。
2.多参加锻炼。
3.喝足够的水。
May
5th
Dear
Jane,
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Best
wishes
to
you.
Yours,
Li
Hua
第一单元测评
答案
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
M:Hi,have
you
finished
your
lesson?
W:Not
yet.Is
there
something
wrong?
M:Well,I
want
to
catch
the
last
bus
home,but
I
need
to
lock
the
doors
on
this
floor
before
I
leave,so...
1.What
does
the
man
need
to
do
now?
A.Lock
the
doors.
B.Catch
the
last
train.
C.Finish
his
lesson.
答案:A
W:He
chose
a
terrible
location
for
his
new
bar.It
will
probably
shut
down.
M:It
all
depends.Advertising
might
help.
2.Why
does
the
woman
say
the
bar
would
shut
down?
A.Because
of
its
location.
B.Because
of
its
advertisements.
C.Because
of
its
management.
答案:A
M:I
would
like
a
cup
of
coffee
and
some
dessert.
W:Some
sugar
in
your
coffee,sir?
M:No,thanks.Do
you
have
free
wireless
Internet?
W:Yes,we
have.
3.What
does
the
man
want
to
do?
A.Have
a
cup
of
tea.
B.Go
online.
C.Look
at
the
menu.
答案:B
W:OK.I’ve
got
a
new
map.Let’s
check
the
route
from
here
to
the
airport.
M:Where
are
we?Oh,here
we
are.So
we
need
to
drive
on
the
A120
and
then
turn
left.
W:No,we’ll
need
to
turn
right.We’re
coming
from
that
direction,remember?
4.Where
will
the
speakers
finally
go?
A.To
the
A120.　B.To
the
airport.　C.To
their
home.
答案:B
W:How
do
you
feel
about
the
concert?Do
you
think
it
will
be
a
success?
M:Oh,yes.The
guys
and
I
have
been
working
on
this
show
for
the
last
three
months.
5.How
does
the
man
feel?
A.Confident.
B.Impatient.
C.Worried.
答案:A
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6、7题。
W:Shall
we
go
to
watch
the
volleyball
game
tonight?
M:Yes,but
which
teams
are
playing?
W:China
National
Team
against
the
Russian
Team.
M:If
I
remember
correctly,the
two
teams
have
played
with
each
other
quite
often
before
in
international
games.
W:You’re
right,and
I
have
noticed
that
the
scores
have
been
very
close,although
our
team
was
often
beaten.
M:I
bet
they’ll
have
another
close
match
tonight.
6.What
will
the
speakers
do
tonight?
A.Play
a
game.
B.Watch
a
match.
C.Visit
a
volleyball
player.
答案:B
7.What
does
the
man
think
of
the
result?
A.China
will
lose.
B.Russia
will
lose.
C.It
will
be
a
close
match.
答案:C
听第7段材料,回答第8至10题。
W:I’m
sorry,your
laundry
hasn’t
come
back
yet.
M:But
I
brought
it
in
half
a
month
ago.
W:I
know,but
there’s
been
a
problem
at
the
factory
and
everything’s
delayed.
M:Well,I
trust
my
suit
is
ready.Here
is
the
ticket.
W:I’ll
go
and
check
for
you...Yes,your
suit
is
ready.Here
it
is.
M:Oh,good.But
look,that
big
dirty
spot
I
told
you
about
is
still
there.
W:Well,I
don’t
think
they
can
remove
it.It’s
in
the
material.
M:What
kind
of
excuse
is
that?You
should
have
told
me
before.
W:I’m
sorry,sir.You
can
send
it
back
if
you
like.But
it’ll
take
a
week.
M:A
week?But
I
need
it
for
Saturday
evening.No,I’ll
take
it
now.How
much
is
it?
W:Ten
dollars.
M:Ten
dollars?For
that?No
way,you
can’t
expect
me
to
pay
that
much.
8.Where
does
the
conversation
take
place?
A.At
the
cleaner’s.
B.In
a
restaurant.
C.In
a
clothes
shop.
答案:A
9.When
will
the
man
need
to
use
the
suit?
A.On
Saturday
evening.
B.One
week
later.
C.Half
a
month
later.
答案:A
10.How
does
the
man
sound
in
the
end?
A.Satisfied.
B.Angry.
C.Sorry.
答案:B
听第8段材料,回答第11至13题。
M:Do
you
think
it
is
necessary
for
me
to
prepare
some
topics
to
talk
about
at
English
Corner?
W:Yes,because
it
is
the
first
time
that
you
have
been
going
there.You
should
prepare
something
in
case
you
are
too
nervous.But
after
three
or
four
times,you
won’t
have
to
do
that
anymore.
M:Why
not?
W:If
you
prepare
some
topics
in
advance,your
conversation
at
the
corner
will
always
be
limited
by
the
sentences
you
have
prepared.If
someone
asks
you
a
question
outside
of
them,you’ll
have
nothing
to
say.So
remember
not
to
become
too
dependent
on
what
you’ve
prepared.
M:What
if
I
can’t
understand
people’s
questions?
W:That
happens
to
everyone
at
English
Corner.So
don’t
worry.You
can
always
ask
them
to
repeat
the
question.
M:Won’t
it
be
embarrassing
if
I
still
can’t
understand?
W:It’ll
be
OK.If
it
happens,the
person
will
try
to
explain
the
question
to
you
in
another
way.
11.What
will
happen
if
the
man
always
prepares
topics
for
English
Corner?
A.He’ll
have
good
conversations
with
others.
B.He’ll
be
limited
by
what
he
has
prepared.
C.He’ll
become
even
more
nervous.
答案:B
12.What’s
the
man’s
concern?
A.He
can’t
understand
people’s
questions.
B.He
has
nothing
to
say.
C.People
may
not
understand
him.
答案:A
13.What
is
the
woman
like?
A.Patient.
B.Strict.
C.Humorous.
答案:A
听第9段材料,回答第14至16题。
M:When
you
are
in
a
restaurant
and
you
want
the
waiter
to
bring
you
the
bill,what
do
you
do
to
attract
his
attention?
W:I
just
make
eye-contact
with
him
and
nod
my
head.Then
I
ask
him
when
he
comes
to
the
table.Why
do
you
ask?
M:I
went
out
with
my
friends
to
a
nice
restaurant
last
night.I
noticed
that
many
people
shouted
for
the
bill.
W:That
seems
a
little
impolite
for
such
a
fancy
restaurant.
M:That’s
what
I
thought.Anyway,what
did
you
do
yesterday
evening?
W:Well,it
was
warm,so
I
went
outside.I
walked
along
the
river
for
a
couple
of
miles.Actually,quite
a
few
other
people
had
the
same
idea.I
ran
into
Jack
there.
M:You
did?How
is
he
these
days?
W:He
seemed
okay.We
didn’t
stop
and
chat
because
we
were
on
opposite
banks
of
the
river.We
just
waved
at
each
other.
14.How
does
the
woman
ask
for
the
bill
in
a
restaurant?
A.By
shouting
at
the
waiter.
B.By
nodding
to
the
waiter.
C.By
ringing
a
bell.
答案:B
15.What
did
the
woman
do
yesterday
evening?
A.She
chatted
online.
B.She
ate
out.
C.She
took
a
walk.
答案:C
16.What
do
we
know
about
her
meeting
with
Jack?
A.They
just
waved
at
each
other.
B.They
talked
for
a
long
time.
C.They
walked
back
home
together.
答案:A
听第10段材料,回答第17至20题。
It
was
the
first
day
of
our
two-week
family
vacation
to
Europe.A
year
ago
when
my
mom’s
50th
birthday
was
coming,she
said
to
us,“What
about
travelling
in
Europe?”
She
wasn’t
interested
in
parties,new
cars
or
celebrations.She
wanted
to
travel.
Of
course,my
brother
Michael
and
I
were
excited
when
she
put
forward
the
idea.Michael,23,was
finishing
up
an
engineering
degree.And
I
had
already
borrowed
a
lot
of
money
for
my
college
education.We
weren’t
going
to
be
able
to
have
a
trip
like
this
on
our
own
for
quite
some
time.Obviously,we
thought
this
was
the
best
idea
our
mother
had
ever
had.
But
we
received
phone
calls
and
emails
from
my
mother
every
day
as
the
date
of
travelling
was
near.“Don’t
forget
to
make
copies
of
your
passports.”
“Make
sure
to
call
the
bank.”
“And
seriously,Cara,pack
sweaters.You’re
going
to
be
cold.”
It
had
been
seven
years
after
I
left
home.And
except
during
the
holidays,my
brother
and
I
hadn’t
spent
much
time
together
with
our
family
for
a
long
time.
17.How
long
was
the
family
vacation?
A.Two
weeks.
B.One
week.
C.Four
days.
答案:A
18.What
did
the
speaker’s
mother
like?
A.Parties.
B.New
cars.
C.Travelling.
答案:C
19.What
was
Michael’s
job
at
that
time?
A.An
engineer.
B.A
teacher.
C.A
student.
答案:C
20.What
did
the
mother
ask
Cara
to
pack?
A.Umbrellas.
B.Sweaters.
C.Food.
答案:B
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
In
Europe,many
people
make
friends
between
their
countries
through
town
twinning.Town
or
city
twinning
means
two
towns
in
different
countries
agree
and
decide
to
become
“twins”
with
a
sister
city
relationship.
The
people
find
pen
friends
in
the
twin
town.They
exchange
newspapers
and
stamps.The
school
teachers
discuss
teaching
methods
with
the
teachers
in
the
twin
town.Officials
visit
the
twin
town
for
celebrations.Ordinary
people
travel
to
the
twin
town,too,but
not
very
often
if
it
is
far
away.
Sometimes,schools
even
exchange
their
classes
for
two
or
three
weeks!For
example,German
middle
school
students
study
for
a
while
at
the
school
in
their
twin
town
in
Britain,staying
with
British
families.A
few
months
later,their
British
friends
come
to
study
in
Germany.
Many
British
towns
are
so
pleased
with
the
results
of
the
twinning
that
they
set
out
to
find
more
than
one
twin
town!
Tonbridge,a
small
town
in
Kent,for
example,has
twin
town
in
both
Germany
and
France.Richmond
near
London
has
relationships
with
Germany,France
and
even
a
town
in
a
Balkan
country!
Town
twinning
can
help
make
friends.It
helps
students
improve
their
language
skills,and
also
helps
people
to
understand
the
differences
between
nations.
21.Twin
towns
develop
　　　.?
A.between
European
countries
and
China
B.in
the
English-speaking
countries
only
C.in
the
same
country
D.between
different
countries
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。从第一段中的“Town
or
city
twinning
means
two
towns
in
different
countries
...”可知姊妹城是在不同的国家之间开展的。
22.How
many
countries
are
mentioned
in
the
passage?
A.4.　　　　　　　　　　B.5.
C.6.
D.7.
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。文中提到Germany,Britain,France和a
Balkan
country。
23.One
of
the
advantages
of
town
twinning
is
　　　.?
A.to
earn
more
money
B.to
set
up
schools
C.to
improve
students’
language
skills
D.to
develop
industry
and
agriculture
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。从文章中最后一段中的“It
helps
students
improve
their
language
skills...”可知缔结姊妹城的优点之一就是提高学生的语言技能。
24.Which
is
the
best
title
for
the
passage?
A.Town
Twinning
B.Friendly
Towns
C.Exchanging
Teachers
and
Students
D.Peace
and
Understanding
答案:A
解析:主旨大意题。文章的第一段为全文的主旨,主要讲的是城市之间成为姊妹城的事。
B
Today’s
post
is
almost
about
signs
in
English.You
will
see
signs
on
the
road
while
driving
or
when
walking
down
a
street.Now
let’s
take
a
closer
look
at
the
signs
in
the
picture
below,so
you
can
fully
understand
what
they
mean
in
case
you
come
across
one
of
them.
Starting
with
the
top
row,we
have
a:
Yield
sign
—
This
sign
indicates
(标示)
that
you
need
to
slow
down,but
you
may
not
have
to
come
to
a
full
stop.
Crosswalk
—
This
is
a
sign
that
indicates
people
have
the
right
of
way
to
cross
the
street,so
cars
have
to
stop
when
they
see
a
person
waiting
next
to
one
of
these
signs.
Second
row:
Do
not
enter
—
This
sign
indicates
you
are
not
allowed
to
enter
a
road
at
that
point.
Buckle
up(系好安全带)!—
There
are
often
signs
on
roads
in
the
United
States
reminding
people
that
wearing
seat
belts(安全带)
is
mandatory
(强制的)
(seat
belt
laws
differ
depending
on
what
state
you
are
in,but
all
US
states
have
seat
belt
laws).
Third
row:
Be
alert
(警惕的)
for
bears
—
This
is
another
sign
that
is
used
to
indicate
to
drivers
and
pedestrians
(行人)
that
they
should
be
alert
for
wildlife
in
the
area.
Playground—This
is
the
sign
used
to
alert
drivers
that
there
is
a
playground
nearby,so
it
is
a
good
idea
to
slow
down
and
watch
for
children.?
25.Where
can
you
often
see
the
signs?
A.In
a
factory.
B.On
a
farm.
C.On
the
road.
D.In
the
class.
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。由第一段第二句“You
will
see
signs
on
the
road...”可知我们能够在公路上见到这些标志。故选C项。
26.What
would
you
do
when
you
see
Yield
sign?
A.Slow
down.
B.Enter
a
road
at
that
point.
C.Have
to
come
to
a
full
stop.
D.Should
be
alert
for
wildlife
in
the
area.
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。由“Yield
sign”部分第一句“This
sign
indicates
that
you
need
to
slow
down...”可知,见到这个标志开车的速度要放慢。故选A项。
27.What
can
be
learned
from
the
passage?
A.US
states
have
the
same
law
about
seat
belts.
B.All
the
people
in
a
car
should
buckle
up
in
US.
C.Pedestrians
should
walk
slowly
at
a
crosswalk.
D.Drivers
should
stop
the
car
at
the
sign
of
playground.
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。由Buckle
up部分中的wearing
seat
belts
is
mandatory可知在美国车上的人们都必须系好安全带。故选B项。
28.What
does
the
underlined
phrase
“watch
for”
in
the
last
line
mean?
A.See.
B.Look
at.
C.Look
for.
D.Pay
attention
to.
答案:D
解析:词义猜测题。由该词所在句子中的there
is
a
playground(操场)可知,提醒司机要注意孩子。故选D项。
C
At
Harton
College—an
English
boarding
(寄宿)
school
for
boys,there
are
many
rules.Fifteen-year-old
Bob
Sanders
often
breaks
them.
The
boys
can
go
into
the
town
in
the
afternoon
after
class.But
they
must
return
to
the
school
at
six
o’clock.One
afternoon
Bob
walked
to
the
town.He
looked
at
the
shops
and
then
went
to
the
cinema.After
the
film,he
looked
at
his
watch.It
was
after
eight
o’clock.He
was
a
little
worried.He
walked
back
to
Harton
College
as
fast
as
possible.
When
he
arrived,he
ran
quickly
to
the
main
entrance.It
was
locked.He
went
round
the
school
building
to
another
door.That
one
was
locked,too.He
looked
up
at
the
window
of
his
dormitory.It
was
on
the
third
floor.The
window
was
open.But
it
was
quite
dark
and
he
could
not
climb
up
the
wall
easily.Then
he
saw
another
open
window
on
the
ground
floor.It
was
the
window
of
the
headmaster’s
study.
He
looked
into
the
room—no
one
was
there.Bob
quickly
climbed
on
to
the
window
and
jumped
into
the
room.Just
then
he
heard
a
noise.Then
someone
turned
on
a
light
in
the
corridor(走廊).Bob
looked
around
and
then
hid
under
the
sofa.One
minute
later,Mr
Mannering,the
headmaster,came
in.He
turned
on
the
light
on
his
desk,and
sat
down
on
the
sofa.Then
he
opened
a
book
and
began
to
read.
Bob
lay
under
the
sofa
as
quietly
as
possible.He
couldn’t
move.The
floor
was
cold
and
uncomfortable.He
looked
at
the
headmaster’s
shoes
and
socks
for
an
hour.
“Why
doesn’t
he
get
up
and
go
to
bed?”
Bob
thought.
Mr.Mannering
read
his
book
for
another
hour.Finally,the
headmaster
closed
his
book
and
stood
up.He
put
the
book
on
a
shelf
and
walked
towards
the
door.
“Thank
God
he
didn’t
find
me
under
the
sofa,”
thought
Bob.
Then
Mr.Mannering
stopped
and
spoke
towards
the
sofa.
“Would
you
turn
off
the
light
when
you
leave?”
He
said,and
left
the
study.
29.Bob
returned
to
the
school
more
than
two
hours
late
because
　　　.?
A.he
enjoyed
himself
too
much
B.he
did
not
catch
the
bus
C.he
hated
the
rules
D.he
ran
into
an
old
friend
答案:A
解析:文章中相继提到鲍勃进城逛商店,之后又去看电影,最后发现时间已八点多了。
30.When
Bob
looked
up
at
the
window
of
his
dormitory,Bob
couldn’t
go
to
his
dormitory
because
　　　.?
A.the
door
was
locked
B.the
window
was
shut
C.it
was
quite
dark
D.the
wall
was
too
high
for
him
to
climb
up
答案:D
解析:根据“But
it
was
quite
dark
and
he
could
not
climb
up
the
wall
easily.”可知,宿舍的窗户虽然开着,但墙太高了鲍勃爬不上去。
31.It’s
obvious
that
　　　.?
A.the
headmaster
didn’t
notice
Bob
B.the
headmaster
found
Bob
under
the
sofa
C.the
headmaster
thought
a
thief
had
broken
into
his
study
D.there
was
a
third
man
in
the
study
答案:B
解析:从“Would
you
turn
off
the
light
when
you
leave?”可知,校长其实早就发现了鲍勃藏在沙发下面。
32.From
this
passage
we
know
that
the
headmaster
is
　　　.?
A.kind
B.strict
C.wise
D.humorous
答案:D
解析:根据校长所说的“Would
you
turn
off
the
light
when
you
leave?”可知他具有幽默感。
D
A
friend
is
better
than
fortune(财富).
A
friend
may
be
worse
than
poison
in
some
cases(情况).
The
two
sentences
above
have
opposite(相反的)
meanings
and
seem
to
be
unreasonable(不合情理的),but
they
can
be
explained
as
follows(如下):the
first
means
all
good
friends
who
drive
us
towards
good
while
the
second
means
all
bad
ones
who
lead
us
into
bad
ways.
My
ideal(理想的)
friend
is
of
course
a
good
friend
whose
goodness
is
shown
below:He
has
no
bad
habits,such
as
smoking
and
drinking.He
lives
a
simple(简朴的)
life.He
studies
hard
so
as
not
to
waste
his
golden
time.At
home
he
honours(尊敬)
his
parents
and
loves
his
brothers;at
school
he
honours
his
teachers
and
shares
the
feelings
of
his
classmates.He
treats(对待)
those
truly
who
are
true
to
him.In
a
word,he
has
all
the
good
characteristics(品质)
that
I
don’t
have.With
his
help
I
can
be
free
from
all
difficulties.
Indeed,if
I
have
such
a
person
as
my
friend,I
shall
never
fear
difficulties
and
I
shall
never
know
the
existence(存在)
of
the
word
“failure”.
33.This
passage
tells
us
　　　.?
A.how
to
make
friends
with
others
B.how
to
help
friends
C.what
kind
of
person
the
writer’s
friend
is
D.what
kind
of
person
we
should
make
friends
with
答案:D
解析:主旨大意题。从整篇文章来看,本文主要告诉我们应该交什么样的朋友。
34.According
to
the
writer,an
ideal
friend
means
　　　.?
A.a
friend
without
bad
habits
B.a
famous
man
C.a
perfect(完美的)
man
D.a
respectable
man
答案:C
解析:推理判断题。从第四段作者对于自己的理想朋友的描述,可推知:A、D两项是其中的一部分,除此之外还有其他方面,作者心目中理想的朋友近乎完美。
35.The
correct
Chinese
meaning
of
the
word
“poison”
is
“　　　”.?
A.监狱
B.人物
C.毒药
D.职位
答案:C
解析:词义猜测题。由画线词前面的worse可推知,poison应指不好的事物,在四个选项中C项符合句意:有些情况下,朋友比毒药还要可怕。
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
How
to
Make
Friends
Friendship
is
a
very
important
human
relationship
and
everyone
needs
good
friends.Good
friendship
has
many
benefits.It
offers
companionship,improves
self-worth
and
promotes
good
health.There
are
times
in
our
lives
such
as
when
we
have
recently
moved
into
a
new
town,or
changed
our
jobs
or
schools.Such
changes
often
leave
us
without
a
friend.　36　
But
for
many
of
us
the
process
is
difficult
and
requires
courage.Below
are
some
helpful
suggestions
on
how
to
make
and
keep
friends.?
1.Associate
with
others.
The
first
step
to
make
friends
is
associating
with
other
people.You
can
go
to
public
places
to
meet
new
people.Besides,you
will
need
to
make
yourself
known
by
becoming
an
active
member
of
such
places.
2.Start
a
conversation.
Starting
a
conversation
is
the
second
most
important
step
in
making
new
friends.　37　
You
can
always
start
the
conversation.Being
able
to
make
small
talk
is
a
very
useful
skill
in
relating
with
other
people.?
3.　38　?
Choosing
friends
with
common
interests
is
important
in
building
friendship
as
these
interests
would
always
bring
you
and
your
friend
together.Hanging
out
will
always
be
a
pleasant
experience.
4.Let
it
grow.
It
is
a
good
thing
to
stay
in
touch.However,try
not
to
press
your
new
friend
with
calls,messages
or
visits
as
this
would
likely
wear
him
or
her
out
and
finally
you
may
lose
your
friend.　39　
The
best
friendships
are
the
ones
that
grow
naturally.?
5.Enjoy
your
friendship.
The
best
way
to
enjoy
your
friendship
is
to
allow
your
friends
to
be
themselves.　40　
Try
not
to
change
them
from
who
they
are
to
what
you
want
them
to
be.Become
the
kind
of
friend
you
will
want
your
friend
to
be
to
you.?
A.Be
cheerful.
B.Do
things
together.
C.Do
not
wait
to
be
spoken
to.
D.Try
not
to
find
fault
with
your
friends.
E.Making
new
friends
comes
easy
for
some
people.
F.For
a
friendship
to
develop
you
need
to
stay
in
touch.
G.So
you
will
need
to
give
your
friend
time
to
react
to
you.
答案:36.E　37.C　38.B　39.G　40.D
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
My
little
daughter,you
are
teaching
me
how
selfless(无私)
real
love
is!
My
wife
called,“How
long
will
you
be
with
that
　41　?Will
you
come
here
and
make
your
darling
daughter
eat
her
food?”
I
threw
the
paper
away
and
　42　
to
the
place.My
daughter,Sindu,sat
there,tears
welling
up
in
her
eyes.In
front
of
her
was
a
big
bowl
of
rice.?
I
　43　
the
bowl
and
persuaded:“Sindu,why
not
take
a
few
mouthfuls
of
the
rice?”?
“OK,Dad.I
will
eat
—
not
just
a
few
mouthfuls,　44　
the
whole
lot
of
this.But...”
Sindu
hesitated.“Dad,if
I
eat
the
whole
rice,will
you
give
me
　45　
I
ask
for?”?
“Promise.”
I
　46　.?
After
eating
the
rice
painfully,Sindu
came
to
me,her
eyes
wide
with
　47　.Now
I
became
a
bit
　48　.“Dear,you
shouldn’t
insist
on
　49　
a
computer
or
any
such
　50　
things.Dad
does
not
have
that
kind
of
money
right
now.”
　51　,“I
want
to
have
my
head
shaved
off(剃掉),this
Sunday!”
was
her
requirement,which
was
far
　52　
my
belief.?
On
Monday
morning,I
　53　
Sindu
at
her
school
and
watched
her
walking
towards
her
classroom.She
turned
around
and
　54　.I
waved
back
with
a
smile.Just
then,a
boy,who
just
got
out
of
a
car,shouted,“Sindu,please
wait
for
me!”
What
　55　
me
was
the
hairless
head
of
that
boy.?
“Sir,your
daughter
is
　56　
indeed!”
Without
introducing
herself,a
lady
standing
beside
me
continued,“That
boy
is
my
son,who
lost
all
his
　57　
because
of
a
disease.He
　58　
to
come
back
to
school
for
fearing
the
unintentional(无意的)but
　59　
teasing(取笑)of
the
schoolmates.Sindu
visited
him
last
week,and
promised
him
that
she
would
take
care
of
the
teasing
problem.But,I
　60　
imagined
she
would
cut
her
lovely
hair
for
my
son!”?
41.A.bowl　　　　　　　　　B.newspaper
C.book
D.food
答案:B
解析:根据空后的“I
threw
the
paper
away...”可知,此处应选择newspaper(报纸)。
42.A.rushed
B.pulled
C.jumped
D.shouted
答案:A
解析:根据空后的the
place可知,此处表示我扔下报纸,冲到(rushed)那个地方(女儿吃饭的地方)。
43.A.took
out
B.picked
up
C.broke
down
D.gave
out
答案:B
解析:take
out“拿出”;pick
up“捡起”;break
down“分解,崩溃,出故障”;give
out“分发,公布”。句意:我拿起碗,劝说:“Sindu,你何不吃几口米饭呢?”故选B项。
44.A.and
B.so
C.or
D.but
答案:D
解析:由空前的not
a
few
mouthfuls可知,此处考查词组not...but...(不是……而是……)。句意:“好的,爸爸,我吃。——不是只吃几口,而是所有这些米饭。但是……”
45.A.what
B.where
C.which
D.how
答案:A
解析:由空后的I
ask
for可知此处用what。句意:如果我吃掉这些米饭,你能给我所要的东西吗?
46.A.moved
B.doubted
C.agreed
D.talked
答案:C
解析:此处表示作者同意女儿的要求,故选agreed(同意)。
47.A.expectation
B.confidence
C.worry
D.attention
答案:A
解析:女儿吃完米饭,开始充满期待地看着作者。故选expectation。
48.A.nervous
B.bored
C.excited
D.relaxed
答案:A
解析:作者因为怕女儿提出无理的要求,显得有些紧张。故选nervous。
49.A.making
B.selling
C.getting
D.studying
答案:C
解析:作者希望女儿不应该要(get)电脑这样的贵重物品。故选C项。
50.A.valuable
B.useful
C.wonderful
D.expensive
答案:D
解析:由空前的a
computer是贵重物品可知,此处应选择expensive。
51.A.Therefore
B.However
C.Besides
D.Anyway
答案:B
解析:作者所认为女儿要的物品和下面女儿提出的要求大相径庭,两者之间存在转折,故选However(然而)。
52.A.to
B.beyond
C.of
D.within
答案:B
解析:beyond
one’s
belief意为“出乎某人意料”。
53.A.met
B.helped
C.dropped
D.collected
答案:C
解析:此处表示“我把孩子送到学校让孩子下车”,drop意为“使下去”。
54.A.shouted
B.hoped
C.waved
D.stared
答案:C
解析:女儿转过身与作者挥手告别。waved意为“挥手”。
55.A.interested
B.frightened
C.pleased
D.surprised
答案:D
解析:由句意“让我感到惊讶的是那个男孩没有头发的头”可知答案为surprised。
56.A.careful
B.hard-working
C.sad
D.great
答案:D
解析:一位女士走过来向作者表扬他的女儿,故此处用great,表示“你的女儿真的很棒。”
57.A.friends
B.hair
C.hope
D.face
答案:B
解析:由上一段最后一句the
hairless
head
of
that
boy可知此处用hair表示“那个男孩是我的儿子,他因为一种疾病头发掉光。”
58.A.refused
B.wished
C.dreamed
D.decided
答案:A
解析:由空后的for
fearing...(唯恐……)可知,此处表示男孩拒绝回学校。故选refused。
59.A.kind
B.hurtful
C.harmless
D.funny
答案:B
解析:由空后的teasing(取笑)可知此处应选择hurtful,表示“伤人的取笑”。
60.A.usually
B.ever
C.never
D.nearly
答案:C
解析:由句意“我绝没有想到他愿意为我的儿子剪掉了自己可爱的头发”可知答案为never,表示出乎意料。
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
I
am
very
happy
to
receive
your
letter.I’m
glad
61.(hear)
that
you
will
come
to
my
city
and
stay
with
us
for
a
few
weeks.62.　　　　　(I)
house
(is)
on
the
Heaven
Street
with
five
rooms,and
one
63.
them
is
living
room,two
bed
rooms,the
other
two
are
kitchen
and
bathroom.I
have
cleaned
a
guest
room
64.　　　　　
you.There
65.　　　　　(be)
a
bed,a
sofa
and
three
chairs
in
this
25
square-meter
room.If
this
room
is
not
suitable
enough,please
write
to
me
66.
I
will
prepare
another
one
for
you.There
is
67.　　　　　
bus
stop
near
my
house,and
you
can
take
Number
1
bus
to
the
cinema
and
Number
2
to
the
supermarket.If
you
have
other
requests(要求),please
feel
68.　　　　　(freely)
to
write
to
me.I
will
try
my
69.　　　　　(good)
to
meet
your
needs.I
wish
you
can
come
soon
and
have
good
70.　　　　　(day)
here.?
答案:61.to
hear　62.My　63.of　64.for　65.is　66.and/so　67.a　68.free　69.best　70.days
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文,文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
Dear
Jin
Jing,
Your
problem
is
common
one
among
middle
school
students.Maybe
the
following
advices
can
help
you.First
in
all,believe
in
yourself.Your
greatest
problem
is
that
you
lack
self-confidence.The
first
thing
you
must
do
it
is
to
smile
at
your
classmates.One
smile
speaks
loud
about
your
wish
to
make
friends
than
any
word.Your
smile
will
show
that
you
are
friendly
to
him.Next,trying
talking
with
a
student
who
is
as
shy
as
you
or
who
share
the
same
interests
with
you.You
can
discuss
your
studies
with
a
classmate
and
you
can
also
talk
about
your
hobbies.Unless
anyone
is
in
trouble,you
should
be
ready
to
help
him
or
her.Once
you
have
confidence,you
can
make
as
many
friends
as
possibly.
Yours,
Lily
答案:
第一句:is后加a
第二句:advices→advice
第三句:第一个in→of
第五句:去掉it
第六句:loud→louder
第七句:him→them
第八句:trying→try;share→shares
第十句:Unless→If
第十一句:possibly→possible
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
假如你叫李华。你的好朋友简最近发现自己在发胖,很苦恼。她写信请你给她就如何避免这一情况提建议。请你根据下面的内容给简写一封信,词数100左右。
要想减肥,应做到以下三点:
1.要保证健康饮食。
2.多参加锻炼。
3.喝足够的水。
May
5th
Dear
Jane,
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Best
wishes
to
you.
Yours,
Li
Hua
【写作指导】
主题:giving
some
advice
on
losing
weight
必备词汇:a
healthy
diet,stay
away
from,take
more
exercise,burn
off
fat,lose
weight
必备句型:
I’m
sorry
to
hear
that...
In
order
to
lose
weight,you
should
eat...
Stay
away
from
food
that
is
rich
in
fat.The
more
active
you
become,the
more
fat
you
will
burn
off...
参考范文:
May
5th?
Dear
Jane,?
I’m
sorry
to
hear
that
you
are
worried
about
being
fat.I
hope
the
following
advice
can
help
you.
First,you
should
eat
a
healthy
diet.In
order
to
lose
weight,you
should
eat
some
vegetables
and
fruit.And
stay
away
from
food
that
is
rich
in
fat.
Second,take
more
exercise.The
more
active
you
become,the
more
fat
you
will
burn
off
and
the
thinner
you
will
be.
Third,drink
enough
water.Drinking
enough
water
can
support
your
body
and
activities,and
help
you
lose
weight.
If
you
follow
the
advice,you
will
be
sure
to
become
thinner
and
stay
healthy.
Best
wishes
to
you.?
Yours,
Li
Hua?第四单元测评
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
M:Look
at
those
beautiful
birds
over
there.I
think
you
can
teach
them
to
talk.
W:But
look
at
the
price!
I’d
rather
have
a
cat.
1.Where
does
the
conversation
most
probably
take
place?
A.In
a
park.
B.In
a
zoo.
C.In
a
pet
store.
M:I
suppose
the
reason
why
so
many
tourists
come
here
is
that
everything
is
so
cheap.
W:Cheap?Nothing
is
really
cheap
here.
2.What
does
the
woman
mean?
A.Things
here
are
very
cheap.
B.Things
here
are
not
cheap.
C.She
doesn’t
know
whether
things
here
are
cheap
or
not.
W:Where
are
you
going
to
plant
the
tree?By
the
front
door?
M:No,that
would
be
silly.It’ll
grow
too
big.I’m
going
to
put
it
at
the
back
of
the
garage.
W:I
thought
it
would
be
better
at
the
end
of
the
garden.
M:OK.
3.Where
are
the
two
speakers
going
to
plant
the
tree?
A.By
the
front
door.
B.At
the
back
of
the
garage.
C.At
the
end
of
the
garden.
M:Can
I
take
your
coat,madam?
W:Thank
you.
M:And
would
you
like
something
to
drink
before
you
order
your
meal?
4.Where
does
the
conversation
take
place?
A.In
a
shop.
B.In
a
hotel.
C.In
a
restaurant.
W:Where
were
you
on
Christmas,David?I
called
you
several
times
and
nobody
was
home.
M:My
parents
and
I
travelled
to
New
Zealand
to
visit
my
uncle.It
was
quite
an
experience
to
spend
Christmas
in
summer.
5.What
do
we
learn
from
the
conversation?
A.The
man
went
to
New
Zealand
during
Christmas.
B.The
man
stayed
at
home
during
the
holiday.
C.The
man’s
parents
live
in
New
Zealand.
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6至8题。
M:Hello!
Police
Station.
W:Hello!
This
is
Mrs
Black.
M:Can
I
help
you,madam?
W:Yes.I’ve
just
come
home
from
work
and
I
find
someone
has
broken
into
my
house
and
stolen
all
my
money
and
jewellery.Could
you
please
come
over
immediately?
M:Sure.Where
do
you
live?
W:My
house
is
No.14
on
the
5th
Avenue.
M:OK.Don’t
worry,madam.We’ll
be
there
in
about
10
minutes.
6.Who
is
the
woman
speaking
to?
A.Her
husband.
B.A
policeman.
C.A
firefighter.
7.Where
does
the
woman
live?
A.No.4
on
the
5th
Avenue.
B.No.14
on
the
15th
Avenue.
C.No.14
on
the
5th
Avenue.
8.What
has
happened
to
the
woman’s
house?
A.It’s
been
burnt
down.
B.It’s
been
broken
into.
C.It’s
been
damaged.
听第7段材料,回答第9至11题。
M:Good
morning,madam.Can
I
help
you?
W:Ah,yes.I
want
to
go
to
New
York
and
I’m
not
so
sure
of
the
best
way
to
get
there.
M:Well,you
could
get
there
by
the
long
distance
bus.It’s
only
$15.
W:Mm,that’s
not
bad.How
long
does
it
take
me
to
get
there?
M:It
takes
you
about
ten
hours.
W:Ten
hours?
M:Well,yes.But
you
can
go
at
night,so
you
might
get
some
sleep
anyway.
W:Oh,no.I
never
sleep
sitting
up.
9.What
does
the
woman
want
to
know?
A.The
best
way
to
go
to
New
York.
B.The
quickest
way
to
go
to
New
York.
C.The
cheapest
way
to
go
to
New
York.
10.How
much
does
it
cost
the
woman
to
go
to
New
York
by
bus?
A.$5.　　　　
B.$15.　　　　C.$50.
11.How
long
does
it
take
to
go
to
New
York
by
bus?
A.Four
hours.
B.Ten
hours.
C.Two
days.
听第8段材料,回答第12至15题。
W:May
I
help
you?
M:Yes,I
would
like
some
tickets
for
next
week’s
ballet
performances.
W:Which
performance
do
you
wish
to
attend?There
will
be
three:Thursday,Friday
and
Sunday
evenings.
M:Are
there
still
seats
for
all
the
performances?
W:Not
many,and
very
few
together.How
many
tickets
do
you
want?
M:Just
two,preferably
together.The
date
is
less
important.
W:I
have
two
together
in
the
last
row
for
Sunday
evening.
M:That
would
be
fine.How
much
are
they?
W:Ten
dollars
each.That
will
be
20
dollars
for
the
two
tickets.
M:Yes,here
you
are.Thank
you.
W:You’re
welcome.
12.When
will
the
ballet
performances
be
on?
A.This
week.
B.Next
week.
C.Next
month.
13.When
will
the
man
attend
the
performance?
A.On
Sunday
evening.
B.On
Thursday
evening.
C.On
Friday
evening.
14.How
much
does
the
man
pay
for
the
tickets?
A.$20.
B.$10.
C.$40.
15.Where
are
they
now?
A.In
a
bookstore.
B.In
a
clothing
store.
C.In
a
theatre.
听第9段材料,回答第16至17题。
M:Mary,have
you
seen
the
pictures
I
took
in
Wudang
Mountain?
W:No,I
haven’t.Where
are
they?
M:Here
are
some.
W:How
beautiful
the
mountain
is!
And
your
pictures
are
wonderful,too.Can
you
tell
me
something
about
the
mountain?
M:Of
course,Wudang
Mountain
in
Shiyan,Hubei
Province
is
famous
for
its
natural
sights,Wudang
kung
fu
and
buildings.
W:Did
you
have
a
good
time?
M:Yes,I
made
some
new
friends
who
are
also
interested
in
Chinese
kung
fu
and
we
enjoyed
the
sunrise
together
on
the
top
of
the
mountain.
W:It’s
great.I
hope
I
can
visit
it
one
day.
16.What’s
Wudang
Mountain
famous
for?
A.Delicious
food.
B.Beautiful
sights.
C.Friendly
people.
17.What
do
we
know
about
the
woman?
A.She
likes
taking
pictures.
B.She
doesn’t
like
climbing.
C.She
hasn’t
been
to
Wudang
Mountain.
听第10段材料,回答第18至20题。
My
name
is
Mary
Potter.You
asked
for
people
to
speak
out
who
are
against
knocking
down
the
old
hotel
to
put
up
a
new
shopping
centre.And
I’m
one
of
those
people.I
realize
that
the
hotel
cannot
make
money
for
the
town
right
now.I
also
admit
that
the
hotel
is
very
old
and
in
poor
condition.But
if
we
destroy
the
hotel,we
will
be
destroying
an
important
piece
of
our
town’s
history.The
hotel
used
to
be
an
important
social,political
and
cultural
center
of
our
town.And
it
won’t
be
very
difficult
to
fix
up
the
hotel.In
fact,if
we
get
some
people
from
around
town
to
volunteer
some
of
their
skills
and
time,we
wouldn’t
have
to
use
any
of
the
town’s
money
or
ask
the
state
for
money.Once
the
hotel
is
rebuilt,it
could
start
to
attract
people
to
our
town
again.One
last
reason
to
keep
the
hotel,we
have
already
got
one
shopping
center,and
that’s
enough.Well,I
hope
you
will
consider
what
I
say.Thanks
for
listening.
18.What’s
the
purpose
of
the
speaker?
A.To
move
to
the
hotel.
B.To
be
against
knocking
down
the
hotel.
C.To
explain
the
history
of
the
hotel.
19.What
does
the
speaker
suggest
as
a
way
to
rebuild
the
hotel?
A.Using
the
local
volunteers.
B.Asking
the
town
for
money.
C.Asking
the
state
for
money.
20.What
does
the
speaker
think
might
be
an
advantage
of
rebuilding
the
hotel?
A.It
would
be
stay
open
all
year.
B.It
could
serve
as
a
shopping
center.
C.It
could
bring
business
into
the
town.
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
Earthquakes
are
something
that
people
fear.There
are
some
places
that
have
few
or
no
earthquakes.Most
places
in
the
world,however,have
them
regularly.Countries
that
have
a
lot
of
earthquakes
are
usually
quite
mountainous(多山的).
The
most
talked
about
earthquake
in
the
United
States
was
in
San
Francisco
in
1906.Over
700
people
died
in
it.The
strongest
one
in
North
America
was
in
1964.It
happened
in
Alaska.
Strong
earthquakes
are
not
always
the
ones
that
kill
the
most
people.In
1755,one
of
the
strongest
earthquakes
ever
recorded
was
felt
in
Portugal.Around
2,000
people
died.
In
1923,a
very
strong
earthquake
hit
Tokyo,Yokohama
area
of
Japan.A
hundred
and
forty
thousand
people
died.Most
of
them
died
in
fires
which
followed
the
earthquake.
One
of
the
worst
earthquakes
ever
was
in
China
in
1976.It
killed
a
large
number
of
people.The
worst
earthquake
ever
reported
was
also
in
China,in
which
830,000
people
were
killed.This
earthquake
happened
in
1556.
Earthquakes
worry
people
a
lot.The
reason
is
that
we
often
do
not
know
when
they
are
coming.People
cannot
prepare
for
them.
21.We
can
infer
from
the
passage
that
　　　.?
A.people
are
not
afraid
of
earthquakes
B.only
strong
earthquakes
kill
a
large
number
of
people
C.a
large
number
of
earthquakes
often
happen
next
to
mountains
D.earthquakes
happen
only
in
a
few
places
along
the
coast
22.How
many
people
died
in
the
earthquake
which
happened
in
Portugal
in
1755?
A.500.　　　　　　　
　B.140,000.
C.830,000.
D.About
2,000.
23.When
and
where
was
the
worst
earthquake
ever
reported?
A.1964;Alaska.
B.1556;China.
C.1923;Japan.
D.1979;China.
24.According
to
the
passage,which
of
the
following
is
NOT
true?
A.The
stronger
the
earthquake
is,the
more
people
are
killed.
B.Earthquakes
often
come
unexpectedly.
C.Earthquakes
can
cause
fires.
D.People
still
don’t
know
when
an
earthquake
will
come.
B
“Earthquake!”
The
word
flashed
in
my
brain.A
roaring
sound
filled
my
ears.I
tried
to
slide
beneath
my
desk.The
desk
did
a
wild
tap
dance,slipping
and
sliding
towards
the
centre
of
the
room.I
twisted
my
body
and
grabbed
at
the
windowsill
behind
me,somehow
kicking
free
of
my
dancing
chair.I
tried
to
stand.My
legs
skated
away
as
if
on
a
bucking
escalator.
My
fingers
shook,grasped
and
held
the
windowsill
tightly.Somewhere
through
the
roar
sounded
the
terrified
scream
of
some
wounded
animal.I
looked
behind
me
and
tried
to
steady
my
gaze
on
the
other
kids
but
the
scene
was
a
dizzy
nightmare.Some
of
the
class
were
sitting
in
the
middle
of
the
room,surrounded
by
chairs
and
desks.One
girl
was
screaming.A
boy
was
trying
to
claw
his
way
across
the
floor
to
the
door
in
a
crazy
overarm
crawl.
My
grip
froze
me
to
the
windowsill.
I
cried
aloud,“I’m
going
to
die.I’m
going
to
die.Save
me.I’m
not
ready
to
die.I’m
not
ready!”
I
hunched
forward
on
my
knees
and
pressed
my
face
against
my
clenched
fingers.I
looked
at
the
backs
of
my
fingers
and
stupidly
noticed
the
fragile
pale
hairs
growing
out
of
the
pores.The
fingers
would
soon
cease
to
exist.Somehow
the
impending
horror
of
my
death
was
too
terrible
to
even
cry
about.
Suddenly,I
became
aware
that
the
rocking
had
ceased.Perhaps
I
wasn’t
going
to
die.
25.The
roaring
sound
was
made
by
　　　.?
A.a
wounded
animal
B.people
screaming
C.children
running
D.an
earthquake
26.When
the
narrator
clenches
his
fingers
he
is
　　　.?
A.afraid
B.angry
C.injured
D.impatient
27.Paragraph
2
describes
the
　　　.?
A.injuries
suffered
by
the
narrator
B.effects
of
a
bad
nightmare
C.disorder
in
the
classroom
D.narrator’s
fear
of
death
28.At
the
end
of
the
passage
there
is
a
feeling
of
　　　.?
A.panic
B.hope
C.sorrow
D.excitement
C
Now
many
young
people
are
travelling
around
the
world
on
their
own,not
because
they
have
no
one
to
travel
with,but
because
they
prefer
to
go
alone.
Kristina
Wegscheider
from
California
first
travelled
alone
when
she
was
at
college
and
believed
that
it
was
something
everyone
should
do
at
least
once
in
their
life.“It
opens
up
your
mind
to
new
things
and
pushes
you
out
of
your
comfort
zone.”
Wegscheider
has
visited
46
countries
covering
all
seven
continents.
In
foreign
countries,with
no
one
to
help
you
read
a
map,look
after
you
if
you
get
ill,or
lend
you
money
if
your
wallet
is
stolen,it
is
challenging.This
is
what
drives
young
people
to
travel
alone.It
is
seen
as
character
building
and
a
chance
to
prove
that
they
can
make
it
on
their
own.
Chris
Richardson
decided
to
leave
his
sales
job
in
Australia
to
go
travelling
last
year.He
set
up
a
website,The
Aussie
Nomad,to
document
his
adventures.He
says
he
wished
he
had
traveled
alone
earlier.“The
people
you
meet,the
places
you
visit,or
the
things
you
do,everything
is
up
to
you
and
it
forces
you
to
grow
as
a
person,”
said
the
30-year-old.
Richardson
describes
traveling
alone
like
“a
shot
in
the
arm”,which
“makes
you
a
more
confident
person
that
is
ready
to
deal
with
anything”.He
said,“The
feeling
of
having
conquered
something
on
my
own
is
a
major
part
of
what
drives
me
each
day
when
I’m
dealing
with
a
difficult
task.I
walk
around
with
my
head
up
because
I
know
deep
down
inside
that
nothing
is
impossible
if
you
try.”
The
great
19th
century
explorer
John
Muir
once
said,“Only
by
going
alone
in
silence
can
one
truly
get
into
the
heart
of
the
wilderness.”
29.Which
of
the
following
will
Kristina
Wegscheider
agree
with?
A.Travelling
alone
is
a
necessary
experience
for
everyone.
B.It
is
more
meaningful
to
travel
in
foreign
countries.
C.It
is
comfortable
to
travel
around
without
a
friend.
D.Travelling
abroad
helps
people
to
find
new
things.
30.Travelling
alone
is
challenging
because
　　　.?
A.you
have
to
make
things
on
your
own
B.it
is
hard
for
you
to
prove
yourself
to
others
C.you
depend
on
yourself
whatever
happens
D.it
will
finally
build
your
character
31.What
can
we
infer
about
Chris
Richardson?
A.He
started
travelling
at
an
early
age.
B.He
was
once
shot
in
the
arm.
C.He
used
to
work
as
a
salesman.
D.His
website
inspired
others
a
lot.
32.What
is
the
best
title
for
the
passage?
A.Travel
Abroad
B.Travel
Unaccompanied
C.Travel
Light
D.Travel
Wide
and
Far
D
Krakatau
Volcano(克拉克托火山)is
in
a
small
island
in
Indonesia.It
had
been
peaceful
for
about
200
years
before
it
erupted(爆发)in
1883.
The
first
signs
of
the
activity
of
the
volcano
appeared
in
May
1883,when
fire
and
smoke
could
be
seen
at
the
top
of
the
mountain.Great
noise
could
be
heard
even
in
Jakarta
a
hundred
miles
away.Later
the
activity
grew
much
greater.The
peak(山顶)was
covered
with
smoke
and
fire;the
smoke
at
one
time
was
seventeen
miles
high
in
the
air.The
lava—soft
and
hot
rock—shot
up
into
the
air
and
rolled
down
the
sides
of
the
mountain.
The
mouth
of
the
volcano
was
not
at
the
peak
of
the
mountain
but
on
its
side,close
to
the
sea.As
it
grew
bigger
and
bigger
with
the
eruption,the
sea
water
got
into
it.When
the
sea
water
reached
the
lava
inside
the
volcano,it
made
the
upper
part
of
the
lava
colder
and
harder.And
this
sealed
off(封住)the
rest
of
the
lava
below.As
the
inside
of
the
lava
could
not
break
through
the
seal,the
pressure(压力)built
up
until
the
mountain
blew
up.
The
eruption
of
the
volcano
was
followed
by
several
earthquakes
which
brought
about
bad
result.About
36,000
people
were
killed
and
many
towns
and
villages
near
the
sea
were
completely
destroyed
by
the
great
waves
which
the
earthquake
caused.
33.Give
the
correct
order
of
the
course
of
volcano
eruption.
①The
peak
was
covered
with
smoke
and
fire.
②Fire
and
smoke
could
be
seen
at
the
top
of
the
mountain.
③Great
noise
could
be
heard
a
hundred
miles
away.
④The
lava
shot
into
the
air
and
rolled
down
the
sides
of
the
mountain.
A.①②③④
B.①③②④
C.②③①④
D.④①③②
34.What
made
the
volcano
erupt?
A.The
sea
water
which
went
into
the
volcano.
B.The
lava.
C.The
pressure
which
was
bigger
and
bigger.
D.All
of
the
above.
35.Where
is
the
mouth
of
the
volcano?
A.At
the
peak
of
the
mountain.
B.On
the
side
of
the
mountain
near
the
sea.
C.At
the
foot
of
the
mountain.
D.Inside
the
mountain.
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
　36　
One
of
the
best
things
you
can
possibly
do
is
to
start
your
own
club.It’s
great
fun
especially
if
you’re
the
sort
of
person
who
feels
there’s
never
anything
to
do
during
the
school
holidays.?
The
first
thing
you
need
to
come
up
with
is
an
idea
for
your
club.　37　
Pets,clothes,pop
music
or
dancing
groups,sports,making
things?The
list
is
endless.?
Next
you
need
some
friends
to
be
in
your
club
with
you.　38　
All
you
need
is
three
or
four
other
people
who
are
interested
in
the
same
things
as
you.?
　39　
You
should
all
sit
down
somewhere
together
with
lots
of
pieces
of
paper
and
write
down
every
name
you
can
think
up.That’ll
keep
you
busy
for
ages.?
At
your
first
meeting
you
should
make
up
a
rule
book.And
the
very
first
rule
should
be
no
grown-ups
or
little/big
brothers/sisters!The
best
clubs
are
always
secret!
Now
you
have
just
about
everything
you
need,except
membership
cards.These
are
very
important
and
again
you
can
spend
a
lot
of
time
making
them.　40　
Why
not
leave
some
space
for
a
photo
of
yourself?That
will
make
the
membership
card
really
look
like
it.?
So
there
you
are,get
clubbing!Once
you
get
started
you’ll
think
of
loads
of
more
interesting
things
to
do!
A.That’s
easy.
B.Enjoy
your
own
club!
C.Invite
a
designer
to
join
you.
D.What
are
you
interested
in?
E.Summer
vacation
is
just
around
the
corner.
F.Then
you
need
to
pick
a
name
for
your
club.
G.Use
bright
thick
pens
to
make
a
special
design.
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
A
few
years
ago,I
had
a
long
way
to
get
home
from
work.
One
morning
I
was
on
my
way
home
and
was
very
　41　
after
working
12
hours
at
night.I
　42　
at
a
restaurant
to
have
　43　.It
was
really
a
truck
stop
and
I
was
the
only
customer.?
Right
after
I
placed
my
order
I
saw
a
man
come
in.He
was
　44　
a
small
bag.Perhaps
he
had
seen
better
times,but
there
was
no
sign
of
any
　45　
times
now.He
reached
in
his
pocket
and
　46　
some
change.He
asked
the
waitress
if
38
cents
was
　47　
to
buy
a
cup
of
coffee.She
looked
at
his
hand
and
said,“Of
course.Have
a
　48　.”(Coffee
was
50
cents
a
cup
at
the
time.)It
really
　49　
me
how
she
had
tried
to
help
him
to
　50　
his
pride
and
how
he
had
not
asked
for
any
charity.?
Shortly
before
my
food
came,I
　51　
the
waitress
to
come
over.I
said,“You
know,I
am
not
feeling
well.I
don’t
　52　
I
am
going
to
be
able
to
eat
my
breakfast.Do
you
think
there
is
anyone
here
who
might
eat
it?”She
first
asked
　53　
I
was
OK
and
then
she
understood.She
said,“I
think
so.Are
you
sure?”I
told
her
that
I
was
　54　.?
She
then
walked
over
to
the
gentleman
and
told
him
that
I
had
　55　
food
and
it
was
too
　56　
to
stop
the
order
but
I
didn’t
feel
like
eating.She
asked
if
he
would
be
so
　57　
as
to
take
it
so
that
they
wouldn’t
have
to
　58　
it
in
the
dustbin.I
walked
to
　59　
the
meal,bought
a
gift
card
and
asked
them
to
　60　
it
to
the
gentleman
after
I
left.?
This
man’s
quiet
dignity(尊严)
touched
me
in
ways
that
I
don’t
even
fully
understand.
41.A.bored
B.excited
C.tired
D.worried
42.A.stayed
B.looked
C.stopped
D.appeared
43.A.breakfast
B.supper
C.water
D.coffee
44.A.leaving
B.carrying
C.buying
D.bringing
45.A.difficult
B.free
C.lonely
D.good
46.A.took
out
B.took
off
C.took
over
D.took
up
47.A.necessary
B.expensive
C.enough
D.right
48.A.chance
B.try
C.cent
D.seat
49.A.moved
B.surprised
C.encouraged
D.satisfied
50.A.keep
B.hurt
C.break
D.feel
51.A.expected
B.warned
C.wanted
D.called
52.A.suggest
B.hope
C.realize
D.think
53.A.if
B.until
C.as
D.after
54.A.sure
B.happy
C.full
D.OK
55.A.finished
B.ordered
C.cooked
D.provided
56.A.lazy
B.late
C.impolite
D.hard
57.A.serious
B.generous
C.kind
D.lucky
58.A.lose
B.throw
C.pick
D.hide
59.A.have
B.share
C.pay
for
D.search
for
60.A.post
B.offer
C.show
D.give
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
Li
Hua:First
of
all,I’d
like
you
61.　　　　　　　　　
(tell)
me
a
bit
about
what
you’ve
been
doing.?
Wang
Di:Well,I
left
school
after
I’d
done
my
A-levels.
Li
Hua:What
62.　　　　　　　
(subject)
did
you
take??
Wang
Di:French,German
and
art.
Li
Hua:Art?
Wang
Di:Well,I
really
want
to
study
art.63.　　　　　　
a
friend
of
my
father’s
offered
me
a
job—he’s
an
accountant(会计)
in
the
city.?
Li
Hua:I
see.64.　　　　　　
your
application(申请),you
say
that
you
only
spent
nine
months
with
this
firm
of
accountants.Why
was
that??
Wang
Di:Well,to
be
quite
honest,I
didn’t
like
it—so
I
65.
(get)
a
place
at
the
Art
College
a
year
ago.
Li
Hua:Did
your
father
mind?
Wang
Di:Well,he
was
rather
66.　　　　　　　　　　
(disappoint)
at
first.He’s
an
accountant
too,you
see.?
Li
Hua:Have
you
got
any
brothers
or
sisters?
Wang
Di:Two
brothers,both
are
at
school.One’s
twelve,and
the
67.　　　　　　
is
fifteen.?
Li
Hua:Right!
68.　　　　　　
do
you
do
in
your
spare
time??
Wang
Di:I
like
jazz
and
folk
music.I
go
to
the
theater
sometimes
and
act
a
bit
69.　　　　　　　
(I).I
read
quite
a
lot,and
I’ve
done
a
bit
70.　　　　　　
photography.Also,I’ve
travelled.?
Li
Hua:Very
interesting.I
think
that’s
all
I
want
to
ask
about
your
background.
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
My
aunt
lives
in
a
village
far
from
my
town.Last
year
she
came
to
visiting
us
and
brought
me
a
little
dog
for
a
birthday
present.It
was
little
black
dog
with
white
spots.It
was
so
too
lovely
that
I
liked
it
at
once.Every
day
after
school
I
played
with
the
dog
but
it
gave
me
much
pleasure.I
was
gladly
to
have
it
with
me.One
day
the
dog
went
out
and
never
came
back
again.All
my
families
were
out
searching
for
it
but
it
was
nowhere
to
be
found.What
I
worried
about
it
all
those
days!A
week
late
a
letter
came
from
my
aunt,saying
that
the
little
dog
has
returned.
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
假设你是一名记者,请根据以下提示,用英语向China
Daily写一篇有关台湾大地震的报道。
时间:1999年9月21日凌晨1时47分
震级:7.6级
人员损失:到当晚22时,已有1,670人死亡,3,924人受伤,2,000多人被困,数百人失踪,许多人无家可归。
设施破坏:停电,房屋桥梁倒塌,交通受阻。
严重性:是台湾百年未遇的强烈地震。
注意:1.词数100左右。
2.生词提示:7.6级　magnitude
7.6
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
第四单元测评
答案
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
M:Look
at
those
beautiful
birds
over
there.I
think
you
can
teach
them
to
talk.
W:But
look
at
the
price!
I’d
rather
have
a
cat.
1.Where
does
the
conversation
most
probably
take
place?
A.In
a
park.
B.In
a
zoo.
C.In
a
pet
store.
答案:C
M:I
suppose
the
reason
why
so
many
tourists
come
here
is
that
everything
is
so
cheap.
W:Cheap?Nothing
is
really
cheap
here.
2.What
does
the
woman
mean?
A.Things
here
are
very
cheap.
B.Things
here
are
not
cheap.
C.She
doesn’t
know
whether
things
here
are
cheap
or
not.
答案:B
W:Where
are
you
going
to
plant
the
tree?By
the
front
door?
M:No,that
would
be
silly.It’ll
grow
too
big.I’m
going
to
put
it
at
the
back
of
the
garage.
W:I
thought
it
would
be
better
at
the
end
of
the
garden.
M:OK.
3.Where
are
the
two
speakers
going
to
plant
the
tree?
A.By
the
front
door.
B.At
the
back
of
the
garage.
C.At
the
end
of
the
garden.
答案:C
M:Can
I
take
your
coat,madam?
W:Thank
you.
M:And
would
you
like
something
to
drink
before
you
order
your
meal?
4.Where
does
the
conversation
take
place?
A.In
a
shop.
B.In
a
hotel.
C.In
a
restaurant.
答案:C
W:Where
were
you
on
Christmas,David?I
called
you
several
times
and
nobody
was
home.
M:My
parents
and
I
travelled
to
New
Zealand
to
visit
my
uncle.It
was
quite
an
experience
to
spend
Christmas
in
summer.
5.What
do
we
learn
from
the
conversation?
A.The
man
went
to
New
Zealand
during
Christmas.
B.The
man
stayed
at
home
during
the
holiday.
C.The
man’s
parents
live
in
New
Zealand.
答案:A
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6至8题。
M:Hello!
Police
Station.
W:Hello!
This
is
Mrs
Black.
M:Can
I
help
you,madam?
W:Yes.I’ve
just
come
home
from
work
and
I
find
someone
has
broken
into
my
house
and
stolen
all
my
money
and
jewellery.Could
you
please
come
over
immediately?
M:Sure.Where
do
you
live?
W:My
house
is
No.14
on
the
5th
Avenue.
M:OK.Don’t
worry,madam.We’ll
be
there
in
about
10
minutes.
6.Who
is
the
woman
speaking
to?
A.Her
husband.
B.A
policeman.
C.A
firefighter.
答案:B
7.Where
does
the
woman
live?
A.No.4
on
the
5th
Avenue.
B.No.14
on
the
15th
Avenue.
C.No.14
on
the
5th
Avenue.
答案:C
8.What
has
happened
to
the
woman’s
house?
A.It’s
been
burnt
down.
B.It’s
been
broken
into.
C.It’s
been
damaged.
答案:B
听第7段材料,回答第9至11题。
M:Good
morning,madam.Can
I
help
you?
W:Ah,yes.I
want
to
go
to
New
York
and
I’m
not
so
sure
of
the
best
way
to
get
there.
M:Well,you
could
get
there
by
the
long
distance
bus.It’s
only
$15.
W:Mm,that’s
not
bad.How
long
does
it
take
me
to
get
there?
M:It
takes
you
about
ten
hours.
W:Ten
hours?
M:Well,yes.But
you
can
go
at
night,so
you
might
get
some
sleep
anyway.
W:Oh,no.I
never
sleep
sitting
up.
9.What
does
the
woman
want
to
know?
A.The
best
way
to
go
to
New
York.
B.The
quickest
way
to
go
to
New
York.
C.The
cheapest
way
to
go
to
New
York.
答案:A
10.How
much
does
it
cost
the
woman
to
go
to
New
York
by
bus?
A.$5.　　　　
B.$15.　　　　C.$50.
答案:B
11.How
long
does
it
take
to
go
to
New
York
by
bus?
A.Four
hours.
B.Ten
hours.
C.Two
days.
答案:B
听第8段材料,回答第12至15题。
W:May
I
help
you?
M:Yes,I
would
like
some
tickets
for
next
week’s
ballet
performances.
W:Which
performance
do
you
wish
to
attend?There
will
be
three:Thursday,Friday
and
Sunday
evenings.
M:Are
there
still
seats
for
all
the
performances?
W:Not
many,and
very
few
together.How
many
tickets
do
you
want?
M:Just
two,preferably
together.The
date
is
less
important.
W:I
have
two
together
in
the
last
row
for
Sunday
evening.
M:That
would
be
fine.How
much
are
they?
W:Ten
dollars
each.That
will
be
20
dollars
for
the
two
tickets.
M:Yes,here
you
are.Thank
you.
W:You’re
welcome.
12.When
will
the
ballet
performances
be
on?
A.This
week.
B.Next
week.
C.Next
month.
答案:B
13.When
will
the
man
attend
the
performance?
A.On
Sunday
evening.
B.On
Thursday
evening.
C.On
Friday
evening.
答案:A
14.How
much
does
the
man
pay
for
the
tickets?
A.$20.
B.$10.
C.$40.
答案:A
15.Where
are
they
now?
A.In
a
bookstore.
B.In
a
clothing
store.
C.In
a
theatre.
答案:C
听第9段材料,回答第16至17题。
M:Mary,have
you
seen
the
pictures
I
took
in
Wudang
Mountain?
W:No,I
haven’t.Where
are
they?
M:Here
are
some.
W:How
beautiful
the
mountain
is!
And
your
pictures
are
wonderful,too.Can
you
tell
me
something
about
the
mountain?
M:Of
course,Wudang
Mountain
in
Shiyan,Hubei
Province
is
famous
for
its
natural
sights,Wudang
kung
fu
and
buildings.
W:Did
you
have
a
good
time?
M:Yes,I
made
some
new
friends
who
are
also
interested
in
Chinese
kung
fu
and
we
enjoyed
the
sunrise
together
on
the
top
of
the
mountain.
W:It’s
great.I
hope
I
can
visit
it
one
day.
16.What’s
Wudang
Mountain
famous
for?
A.Delicious
food.
B.Beautiful
sights.
C.Friendly
people.
答案:B
17.What
do
we
know
about
the
woman?
A.She
likes
taking
pictures.
B.She
doesn’t
like
climbing.
C.She
hasn’t
been
to
Wudang
Mountain.
答案:C
听第10段材料,回答第18至20题。
My
name
is
Mary
Potter.You
asked
for
people
to
speak
out
who
are
against
knocking
down
the
old
hotel
to
put
up
a
new
shopping
centre.And
I’m
one
of
those
people.I
realize
that
the
hotel
cannot
make
money
for
the
town
right
now.I
also
admit
that
the
hotel
is
very
old
and
in
poor
condition.But
if
we
destroy
the
hotel,we
will
be
destroying
an
important
piece
of
our
town’s
history.The
hotel
used
to
be
an
important
social,political
and
cultural
center
of
our
town.And
it
won’t
be
very
difficult
to
fix
up
the
hotel.In
fact,if
we
get
some
people
from
around
town
to
volunteer
some
of
their
skills
and
time,we
wouldn’t
have
to
use
any
of
the
town’s
money
or
ask
the
state
for
money.Once
the
hotel
is
rebuilt,it
could
start
to
attract
people
to
our
town
again.One
last
reason
to
keep
the
hotel,we
have
already
got
one
shopping
center,and
that’s
enough.Well,I
hope
you
will
consider
what
I
say.Thanks
for
listening.
18.What’s
the
purpose
of
the
speaker?
A.To
move
to
the
hotel.
B.To
be
against
knocking
down
the
hotel.
C.To
explain
the
history
of
the
hotel.
答案:B
19.What
does
the
speaker
suggest
as
a
way
to
rebuild
the
hotel?
A.Using
the
local
volunteers.
B.Asking
the
town
for
money.
C.Asking
the
state
for
money.
答案:A
20.What
does
the
speaker
think
might
be
an
advantage
of
rebuilding
the
hotel?
A.It
would
be
stay
open
all
year.
B.It
could
serve
as
a
shopping
center.
C.It
could
bring
business
into
the
town.
答案:C
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
Earthquakes
are
something
that
people
fear.There
are
some
places
that
have
few
or
no
earthquakes.Most
places
in
the
world,however,have
them
regularly.Countries
that
have
a
lot
of
earthquakes
are
usually
quite
mountainous(多山的).
The
most
talked
about
earthquake
in
the
United
States
was
in
San
Francisco
in
1906.Over
700
people
died
in
it.The
strongest
one
in
North
America
was
in
1964.It
happened
in
Alaska.
Strong
earthquakes
are
not
always
the
ones
that
kill
the
most
people.In
1755,one
of
the
strongest
earthquakes
ever
recorded
was
felt
in
Portugal.Around
2,000
people
died.
In
1923,a
very
strong
earthquake
hit
Tokyo,Yokohama
area
of
Japan.A
hundred
and
forty
thousand
people
died.Most
of
them
died
in
fires
which
followed
the
earthquake.
One
of
the
worst
earthquakes
ever
was
in
China
in
1976.It
killed
a
large
number
of
people.The
worst
earthquake
ever
reported
was
also
in
China,in
which
830,000
people
were
killed.This
earthquake
happened
in
1556.
Earthquakes
worry
people
a
lot.The
reason
is
that
we
often
do
not
know
when
they
are
coming.People
cannot
prepare
for
them.
21.We
can
infer
from
the
passage
that
　　　.?
A.people
are
not
afraid
of
earthquakes
B.only
strong
earthquakes
kill
a
large
number
of
people
C.a
large
number
of
earthquakes
often
happen
next
to
mountains
D.earthquakes
happen
only
in
a
few
places
along
the
coast
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。根据文章第一句可知A项错误;从文章有关地震所致伤亡情况的叙述来看,B项错误;根据第一段的“Countries
that
have
a
lot
of
earthquakes
are
usually
quite
mountainous(多山的).”可知答案为C项。
22.How
many
people
died
in
the
earthquake
which
happened
in
Portugal
in
1755?
A.500.　　　　　　　
　B.140,000.
C.830,000.
D.About
2,000.
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。根据第三段中“In
1755,one
of
the
strongest
earthquakes
ever
recorded
was
felt
in
Portugal.Around
2,000
people
died.”可知答案。
23.When
and
where
was
the
worst
earthquake
ever
reported?
A.1964;Alaska.
B.1556;China.
C.1923;Japan.
D.1979;China.
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。根据倒数第二段内容可知答案。
24.According
to
the
passage,which
of
the
following
is
NOT
true?
A.The
stronger
the
earthquake
is,the
more
people
are
killed.
B.Earthquakes
often
come
unexpectedly.
C.Earthquakes
can
cause
fires.
D.People
still
don’t
know
when
an
earthquake
will
come.
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。根据第三段中的“Strong
earthquakes
are
not
always
the
ones
that
kill
the
most
people.”可知,A项错误。
B
“Earthquake!”
The
word
flashed
in
my
brain.A
roaring
sound
filled
my
ears.I
tried
to
slide
beneath
my
desk.The
desk
did
a
wild
tap
dance,slipping
and
sliding
towards
the
centre
of
the
room.I
twisted
my
body
and
grabbed
at
the
windowsill
behind
me,somehow
kicking
free
of
my
dancing
chair.I
tried
to
stand.My
legs
skated
away
as
if
on
a
bucking
escalator.
My
fingers
shook,grasped
and
held
the
windowsill
tightly.Somewhere
through
the
roar
sounded
the
terrified
scream
of
some
wounded
animal.I
looked
behind
me
and
tried
to
steady
my
gaze
on
the
other
kids
but
the
scene
was
a
dizzy
nightmare.Some
of
the
class
were
sitting
in
the
middle
of
the
room,surrounded
by
chairs
and
desks.One
girl
was
screaming.A
boy
was
trying
to
claw
his
way
across
the
floor
to
the
door
in
a
crazy
overarm
crawl.
My
grip
froze
me
to
the
windowsill.
I
cried
aloud,“I’m
going
to
die.I’m
going
to
die.Save
me.I’m
not
ready
to
die.I’m
not
ready!”
I
hunched
forward
on
my
knees
and
pressed
my
face
against
my
clenched
fingers.I
looked
at
the
backs
of
my
fingers
and
stupidly
noticed
the
fragile
pale
hairs
growing
out
of
the
pores.The
fingers
would
soon
cease
to
exist.Somehow
the
impending
horror
of
my
death
was
too
terrible
to
even
cry
about.
Suddenly,I
became
aware
that
the
rocking
had
ceased.Perhaps
I
wasn’t
going
to
die.
25.The
roaring
sound
was
made
by
　　　.?
A.a
wounded
animal
B.people
screaming
C.children
running
D.an
earthquake
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。根据文章,作者在文章中谈到的现象,还有一些响声都是来描述地震的。
26.When
the
narrator
clenches
his
fingers
he
is
　　　.?
A.afraid
B.angry
C.injured
D.impatient
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。从文章中我们得知当描述者握紧手指时他非常害怕。
27.Paragraph
2
describes
the
　　　.?
A.injuries
suffered
by
the
narrator
B.effects
of
a
bad
nightmare
C.disorder
in
the
classroom
D.narrator’s
fear
of
death
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。从文章第二段中所提到的孩子、桌子、椅子、屋子等均可说明这地方是教室。
28.At
the
end
of
the
passage
there
is
a
feeling
of
　　　.?
A.panic
B.hope
C.sorrow
D.excitement
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。从文章最后一句“Perhaps
I
wasn’t
going
to
die.”,我们可以看出他有希望了。
C
Now
many
young
people
are
travelling
around
the
world
on
their
own,not
because
they
have
no
one
to
travel
with,but
because
they
prefer
to
go
alone.
Kristina
Wegscheider
from
California
first
travelled
alone
when
she
was
at
college
and
believed
that
it
was
something
everyone
should
do
at
least
once
in
their
life.“It
opens
up
your
mind
to
new
things
and
pushes
you
out
of
your
comfort
zone.”
Wegscheider
has
visited
46
countries
covering
all
seven
continents.
In
foreign
countries,with
no
one
to
help
you
read
a
map,look
after
you
if
you
get
ill,or
lend
you
money
if
your
wallet
is
stolen,it
is
challenging.This
is
what
drives
young
people
to
travel
alone.It
is
seen
as
character
building
and
a
chance
to
prove
that
they
can
make
it
on
their
own.
Chris
Richardson
decided
to
leave
his
sales
job
in
Australia
to
go
travelling
last
year.He
set
up
a
website,The
Aussie
Nomad,to
document
his
adventures.He
says
he
wished
he
had
traveled
alone
earlier.“The
people
you
meet,the
places
you
visit,or
the
things
you
do,everything
is
up
to
you
and
it
forces
you
to
grow
as
a
person,”
said
the
30-year-old.
Richardson
describes
traveling
alone
like
“a
shot
in
the
arm”,which
“makes
you
a
more
confident
person
that
is
ready
to
deal
with
anything”.He
said,“The
feeling
of
having
conquered
something
on
my
own
is
a
major
part
of
what
drives
me
each
day
when
I’m
dealing
with
a
difficult
task.I
walk
around
with
my
head
up
because
I
know
deep
down
inside
that
nothing
is
impossible
if
you
try.”
The
great
19th
century
explorer
John
Muir
once
said,“Only
by
going
alone
in
silence
can
one
truly
get
into
the
heart
of
the
wilderness.”
29.Which
of
the
following
will
Kristina
Wegscheider
agree
with?
A.Travelling
alone
is
a
necessary
experience
for
everyone.
B.It
is
more
meaningful
to
travel
in
foreign
countries.
C.It
is
comfortable
to
travel
around
without
a
friend.
D.Travelling
abroad
helps
people
to
find
new
things.
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。根据文章第二段中的“it
was
something
everyone
should
do”可知答案为A项。
30.Travelling
alone
is
challenging
because
　　　.?
A.you
have
to
make
things
on
your
own
B.it
is
hard
for
you
to
prove
yourself
to
others
C.you
depend
on
yourself
whatever
happens
D.it
will
finally
build
your
character
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。根据文章第三段的第一句话:在国外,没有人帮你看地图,你生病的时候没有人照顾你,你钱包被偷的时候没有人借钱给你,这些都是有挑战性的。因此C项正确。
31.What
can
we
infer
about
Chris
Richardson?
A.He
started
travelling
at
an
early
age.
B.He
was
once
shot
in
the
arm.
C.He
used
to
work
as
a
salesman.
D.His
website
inspired
others
a
lot.
答案:C
解析:推理判断题。根据文章第四段的第一句话可知A项错误;根据第五段的第一句话可知B项错误,文章中用的是比喻,而不是胳膊上真中了一枪;D项文章没有涉及,故C项正确。
32.What
is
the
best
title
for
the
passage?
A.Travel
Abroad
B.Travel
Unaccompanied
C.Travel
Light
D.Travel
Wide
and
Far
答案:B
解析:主旨大意题。文章介绍了单独旅行的好处、挑战及感受。根据文章第一段中的“travelling
around
the
world
on
their
own”以及下文多次出现的alone一词可知,B项适合当作文章标题,其中unaccompanied“无人陪伴的”与alone同义。
D
Krakatau
Volcano(克拉克托火山)is
in
a
small
island
in
Indonesia.It
had
been
peaceful
for
about
200
years
before
it
erupted(爆发)in
1883.
The
first
signs
of
the
activity
of
the
volcano
appeared
in
May
1883,when
fire
and
smoke
could
be
seen
at
the
top
of
the
mountain.Great
noise
could
be
heard
even
in
Jakarta
a
hundred
miles
away.Later
the
activity
grew
much
greater.The
peak(山顶)was
covered
with
smoke
and
fire;the
smoke
at
one
time
was
seventeen
miles
high
in
the
air.The
lava—soft
and
hot
rock—shot
up
into
the
air
and
rolled
down
the
sides
of
the
mountain.
The
mouth
of
the
volcano
was
not
at
the
peak
of
the
mountain
but
on
its
side,close
to
the
sea.As
it
grew
bigger
and
bigger
with
the
eruption,the
sea
water
got
into
it.When
the
sea
water
reached
the
lava
inside
the
volcano,it
made
the
upper
part
of
the
lava
colder
and
harder.And
this
sealed
off(封住)the
rest
of
the
lava
below.As
the
inside
of
the
lava
could
not
break
through
the
seal,the
pressure(压力)built
up
until
the
mountain
blew
up.
The
eruption
of
the
volcano
was
followed
by
several
earthquakes
which
brought
about
bad
result.About
36,000
people
were
killed
and
many
towns
and
villages
near
the
sea
were
completely
destroyed
by
the
great
waves
which
the
earthquake
caused.
33.Give
the
correct
order
of
the
course
of
volcano
eruption.
①The
peak
was
covered
with
smoke
and
fire.
②Fire
and
smoke
could
be
seen
at
the
top
of
the
mountain.
③Great
noise
could
be
heard
a
hundred
miles
away.
④The
lava
shot
into
the
air
and
rolled
down
the
sides
of
the
mountain.
A.①②③④
B.①③②④
C.②③①④
D.④①③②
答案:C
解析:推理判断题。文章第二段讲述了这个问题。
34.What
made
the
volcano
erupt?
A.The
sea
water
which
went
into
the
volcano.
B.The
lava.
C.The
pressure
which
was
bigger
and
bigger.
D.All
of
the
above.
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。火山爆发是A、B、C三项共同作用的结果,并非由其中的一项原因即可爆发。
35.Where
is
the
mouth
of
the
volcano?
A.At
the
peak
of
the
mountain.
B.On
the
side
of
the
mountain
near
the
sea.
C.At
the
foot
of
the
mountain.
D.Inside
the
mountain.
答案:B
解析:细节考查题。根据文章第三段第一句话“The
mouth
of
the
volcano
was
not
at
the
peak
of
the
mountain
but
on
its
side,close
to
the
sea.”来断定答案为B项。
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
　36　
One
of
the
best
things
you
can
possibly
do
is
to
start
your
own
club.It’s
great
fun
especially
if
you’re
the
sort
of
person
who
feels
there’s
never
anything
to
do
during
the
school
holidays.?
The
first
thing
you
need
to
come
up
with
is
an
idea
for
your
club.　37　
Pets,clothes,pop
music
or
dancing
groups,sports,making
things?The
list
is
endless.?
Next
you
need
some
friends
to
be
in
your
club
with
you.　38　
All
you
need
is
three
or
four
other
people
who
are
interested
in
the
same
things
as
you.?
　39　
You
should
all
sit
down
somewhere
together
with
lots
of
pieces
of
paper
and
write
down
every
name
you
can
think
up.That’ll
keep
you
busy
for
ages.?
At
your
first
meeting
you
should
make
up
a
rule
book.And
the
very
first
rule
should
be
no
grown-ups
or
little/big
brothers/sisters!The
best
clubs
are
always
secret!
Now
you
have
just
about
everything
you
need,except
membership
cards.These
are
very
important
and
again
you
can
spend
a
lot
of
time
making
them.　40　
Why
not
leave
some
space
for
a
photo
of
yourself?That
will
make
the
membership
card
really
look
like
it.?
So
there
you
are,get
clubbing!Once
you
get
started
you’ll
think
of
loads
of
more
interesting
things
to
do!
A.That’s
easy.
B.Enjoy
your
own
club!
C.Invite
a
designer
to
join
you.
D.What
are
you
interested
in?
E.Summer
vacation
is
just
around
the
corner.
F.Then
you
need
to
pick
a
name
for
your
club.
G.Use
bright
thick
pens
to
make
a
special
design.
答案:36~40
EDAFG
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
A
few
years
ago,I
had
a
long
way
to
get
home
from
work.
One
morning
I
was
on
my
way
home
and
was
very
　41　
after
working
12
hours
at
night.I
　42　
at
a
restaurant
to
have
　43　.It
was
really
a
truck
stop
and
I
was
the
only
customer.?
Right
after
I
placed
my
order
I
saw
a
man
come
in.He
was
　44　
a
small
bag.Perhaps
he
had
seen
better
times,but
there
was
no
sign
of
any
　45　
times
now.He
reached
in
his
pocket
and
　46　
some
change.He
asked
the
waitress
if
38
cents
was
　47　
to
buy
a
cup
of
coffee.She
looked
at
his
hand
and
said,“Of
course.Have
a
　48　.”(Coffee
was
50
cents
a
cup
at
the
time.)It
really
　49　
me
how
she
had
tried
to
help
him
to
　50　
his
pride
and
how
he
had
not
asked
for
any
charity.?
Shortly
before
my
food
came,I
　51　
the
waitress
to
come
over.I
said,“You
know,I
am
not
feeling
well.I
don’t
　52　
I
am
going
to
be
able
to
eat
my
breakfast.Do
you
think
there
is
anyone
here
who
might
eat
it?”She
first
asked
　53　
I
was
OK
and
then
she
understood.She
said,“I
think
so.Are
you
sure?”I
told
her
that
I
was
　54　.?
She
then
walked
over
to
the
gentleman
and
told
him
that
I
had
　55　
food
and
it
was
too
　56　
to
stop
the
order
but
I
didn’t
feel
like
eating.She
asked
if
he
would
be
so
　57　
as
to
take
it
so
that
they
wouldn’t
have
to
　58　
it
in
the
dustbin.I
walked
to
　59　
the
meal,bought
a
gift
card
and
asked
them
to
　60　
it
to
the
gentleman
after
I
left.?
This
man’s
quiet
dignity(尊严)
touched
me
in
ways
that
I
don’t
even
fully
understand.
41.A.bored
B.excited
C.tired
D.worried
答案:C
解析:由下文中的“working
12
hours
at
night”可知,作者非常“累(tired)”。
42.A.stayed
B.looked
C.stopped
D.appeared
答案:C
解析:由下文中的
“a
truck
stop”
可知,作者在一家餐厅前“停了下来(stopped)”。
43.A.breakfast
B.supper
C.water
D.coffee
答案:A
解析:由上文中的
“after
working
12
hours
at
night”
及下文第四段中的
“be
able
to
eat
my
breakfast”
可知此处指的是吃
“早饭(breakfast)”。
44.A.leaving
B.carrying
C.buying
D.bringing
答案:B
解析:他
“拿(carrying)”
着一个小包。
45.A.difficult
B.free
C.lonely
D.good
答案:D
解析:由上文中的
“had
seen
better
times”
及下文该男子没钱这一事实可判断,他看上去日子过得不
“好(good)”。
46.A.took
out
B.took
off
C.took
over
D.took
up
答案:A
解析:由下文中的
“38
cents”
可知,他伸进口袋
“拿出(took
out)”
一些零钱。
47.A.necessary
B.expensive
C.enough
D.right
答案:C
解析:由下文中的
“Coffee
was
50
cents
a
cup
at
the
time.”
可知,他问服务员38美分是否
“够(enough)”
买一杯咖啡。
48.A.chance
B.try
C.cent
D.seat
答案:D
解析:根据
“Of
course”
可知,服务员让他先
“坐下(Have
a
seat)”。
49.A.moved
B.surprised
C.encouraged
D.satisfied
答案:B
解析:参见下题解析。
50.A.keep
B.hurt
C.break
D.feel
答案:A
解析:由上文中的
“38
cents”
和
“Coffee
was
50
cents
a
cup
at
the
time.”
可知,虽然这个人的钱不够买一杯咖啡,但服务员还是让他坐下了,这让作者很
“吃惊(surprised)”,因为服务员在试图
“维护(keep)”
这个人的尊严。
51.A.expected
B.warned
C.wanted
D.called
答案:D
解析:由下文中作者与服务员的对话可知,作者
“叫(called)”
服务员过来。
52.A.suggest
B.hope
C.realize
D.think
答案:D
解析:由下文中的
“Do
you
think
there
is
anyone
here
who
might
eat
it?”
可知,作者“觉得(think)”他吃不成早饭了。
53.A.if
B.until
C.as
D.after
答案:A
解析:由上文中的
“I
am
not
feeling
well”
和下文中的
“then
she
understood”
可知,服务员刚开始没明白作者的意思,询问作者
“是否(if)”
有事。
54.A.sure
B.happy
C.full
D.OK
答案:A
解析:由上文中的
“Are
you
sure?”
可知,作者说他很
“确定(sure)”。
55.A.finished
B.ordered
C.cooked
D.provided
答案:B
解析:由上文第三段中的
“I
placed
my
order”
可知选ordered。
56.A.lazy
B.late
C.impolite
D.hard
答案:B
解析:参见下题解析。
57.A.serious
B.generous
C.kind
D.lucky
答案:C
解析:由下文中的
“take
it”
可知,服务员告诉男子已经太
“晚(late)”
了,无法取消订餐,问他是否可以出于
“好心(kind)”
把那份早餐吃掉。
58.A.lose
B.throw
C.pick
D.hide
答案:B
解析:由下文中的
“dustbin”
可知,这样的话,他们就不用把那份早餐
“扔进(throw)”
垃圾桶里了。
59.A.have
B.share
C.pay
for
D.search
for
答案:C
解析:早餐是作者点的,他当然要去
“结账(pay
for)”。
60.A.post
B.offer
C.show
D.give
答案:D
解析:作者让服务员在他走之后把礼物卡
“给(give)”
了那个人。
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
Li
Hua:First
of
all,I’d
like
you
61.　　　　　　　　　
(tell)
me
a
bit
about
what
you’ve
been
doing.?
Wang
Di:Well,I
left
school
after
I’d
done
my
A-levels.
Li
Hua:What
62.　　　　　　　
(subject)
did
you
take??
Wang
Di:French,German
and
art.
Li
Hua:Art?
Wang
Di:Well,I
really
want
to
study
art.63.　　　　　　
a
friend
of
my
father’s
offered
me
a
job—he’s
an
accountant(会计)
in
the
city.?
Li
Hua:I
see.64.　　　　　　
your
application(申请),you
say
that
you
only
spent
nine
months
with
this
firm
of
accountants.Why
was
that??
Wang
Di:Well,to
be
quite
honest,I
didn’t
like
it—so
I
65.
(get)
a
place
at
the
Art
College
a
year
ago.
Li
Hua:Did
your
father
mind?
Wang
Di:Well,he
was
rather
66.　　　　　　　　　　
(disappoint)
at
first.He’s
an
accountant
too,you
see.?
Li
Hua:Have
you
got
any
brothers
or
sisters?
Wang
Di:Two
brothers,both
are
at
school.One’s
twelve,and
the
67.　　　　　　
is
fifteen.?
Li
Hua:Right!
68.　　　　　　
do
you
do
in
your
spare
time??
Wang
Di:I
like
jazz
and
folk
music.I
go
to
the
theater
sometimes
and
act
a
bit
69.　　　　　　　
(I).I
read
quite
a
lot,and
I’ve
done
a
bit
70.　　　　　　
photography.Also,I’ve
travelled.?
Li
Hua:Very
interesting.I
think
that’s
all
I
want
to
ask
about
your
background.
答案:61.to
tell　62.subjects　63.But　64.In　65.got　66.disappointed　67.other　68.What　69.myself　70.of
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
My
aunt
lives
in
a
village
far
from
my
town.Last
year
she
came
to
visiting
us
and
brought
me
a
little
dog
for
a
birthday
present.It
was
little
black
dog
with
white
spots.It
was
so
too
lovely
that
I
liked
it
at
once.Every
day
after
school
I
played
with
the
dog
but
it
gave
me
much
pleasure.I
was
gladly
to
have
it
with
me.One
day
the
dog
went
out
and
never
came
back
again.All
my
families
were
out
searching
for
it
but
it
was
nowhere
to
be
found.What
I
worried
about
it
all
those
days!A
week
late
a
letter
came
from
my
aunt,saying
that
the
little
dog
has
returned.
答案:第二句:visiting→visit;for→as
第三句:was后加a
第四句:去掉too
第五句:but→and
第六句:gladly→glad
第八句:families→family
第九句:What→How
第十句:late→later;has→had
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
假设你是一名记者,请根据以下提示,用英语向China
Daily写一篇有关台湾大地震的报道。
时间:1999年9月21日凌晨1时47分
震级:7.6级
人员损失:到当晚22时,已有1,670人死亡,3,924人受伤,2,000多人被困,数百人失踪,许多人无家可归。
设施破坏:停电,房屋桥梁倒塌,交通受阻。
严重性:是台湾百年未遇的强烈地震。
注意:1.词数100左右。
2.生词提示:7.6级　magnitude
7.6
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
参考范文:
At
1:47
am
on
September
21st
1999,a
terrible
earthquake
of
magnitude
7.6
shook
Taiwan.
By
22:00
pm
the
number
of
people
who
were
killed
in
the
earthquake
had
reached
1,670.As
many
as
3,924
people
were
injured.Over
2,000
people
were
trapped
in
the
fallen
buildings
and
hundreds
of
people
were
still
missing.A
great
number
of
people
had
lost
their
homes.The
earthquake
had
the
electricity
cut
off,the
traffic
stopped
and
a
great
many
buildings
and
bridges
were
destroyed.It
is
the
strongest
earthquake
that
has
ever
hit
Taiwan
in
a
century.第五单元测评
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
M:Sorry,I
have
forgotten
John’s
address.
W:You
forgot
again!
It’s
1343
Street.
1.What’s
John’s
address?
A.1434
Street.
B.1344
Street.
C.1343
Street.
M:I
need
some
stamps
and
some
envelopes
as
well.
W:Will
you
step
right
over
to
the
second
window,please?
2.Where
is
the
conversation
probably
taking
place?
A.On
a
bus.
B.On
the
steps.
C.In
a
post
office.
M:Your
skirt
is
quite
beautiful
in
colour,isn’t
it?
W:Yes,I
bought
it
at
a
sale
for
half
price.It
cost
me
$12.
3.How
much
should
the
skirt
have
cost?
A.$24.　　　
　B.$12.　　
　　C.$6.
M:I
hope
I
can
see
you
at
my
birthday
party.
W:Oh,dear,I’ve
almost
forgotten.When
is
it?
M:Well,the
day
after
April
Fools’
Day.Easy
to
remember,isn’t
it?
4.When
is
the
man’s
birthday?
A.April
1st.
B.April
2nd.
C.April
3rd.
M:I
hear
you
are
going
to
drive
to
New
York
this
weekend.
W:Oh,I’ve
changed
my
mind.
M:What?
W:I
think
flying
will
be
more
comfortable.
5.How
will
the
woman
get
to
New
York?
A.By
car.
B.By
train.
C.By
airplane.
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6至8题。
M:Excuse
me,madam.I’m
wondering
if
you
could
tell
me
the
place
where
I
can
repair
my
shoes?
W:There’s
one
on
the
Fifth
Street.
M:Thank
you,but
how
far
is
it
to
that
store?
W:Not
very
far
and
it
is
not
difficult
to
find.Just
keep
walking
and
after
two
blocks
you
will
see
a
supermarket
on
your
left.The
store
is
next
to
the
supermarket.
M:Oh,thank
you
very
much.
W:You’re
welcome.You
won’t
miss
it,young
man.
6.What
does
the
man
want
to
do?
A.To
have
his
shoes
mended.
B.To
buy
a
pair
of
new
shoes.
C.To
do
the
shopping
in
a
supermarket.
7.How
far
is
the
supermarket?
A.Two
blocks
away.
B.Five
blocks
away.
C.Six
blocks
away.
8.How
will
the
man
get
to
the
place?
A.By
bus.
B.On
foot.
C.In
his
car.
听第7段材料,回答第9至11题。
M:What’s
the
matter,Alice?
W:Sorry,Mr
Harrison.I
missed
my
train.
M:Why
did
you
miss
your
train?
W:Because
I
left
home
a
little
late.
M:Did
you
get
up
late
or
something?
W:No.My
aunt
called
me
at
the
last
minute.
M:Tell
her
not
to
call
you
in
the
morning.
W:I
will,Mr
Harrison.I’m
really
sorry
for
being
late.
M:If
you
are
late
again,I
won’t
let
you
pass
for
this
class.
9.What’s
the
relationship
(关系)
between
the
two
speakers?
A.Secretary
and
boss.
B.Teacher
and
student.
C.Doctor
and
patient.
10.Why
was
she
late?
A.Her
aunt
called
her
to
get
up
late.
B.She
missed
the
bus.
C.She
got
a
telephone
call.
11.What
can
we
know
about
the
teacher?
A.He
is
strict
with
his
students.
B.He
is
cold
to
his
students.
C.He
gets
angry
easily.
听第8段材料,回答第12至14题。
M:What
seems
to
be
the
matter?
W:I
just
can’t
sleep
well,doctor.
M:I
see.And
how
long
have
you
had
this
problem?
W:Oh,for
about
two
weeks
now.
M:Two
weeks.Do
you
have
headaches?
W:Sometimes.
M:Fever?
W:No.
M:Are
you
having
any
family
problems?
W:No,not
really.We
all
get
along
pretty
well.
M:And
how
about
your
work?
W:Well,I’ve
been
working
a
lot
lately—more
than
11
hours
a
day.
M:Maybe
you
should
take
a
vacation
and
just
rest
for
a
few
days.
W:Well,I
can’t
right
now.We’re
in
the
middle
of
some
important
business.
M:Yes,I
understand,but
you
really
need
to
slow
down.You’re
going
to
kill
yourself
if
you
go
on
like
this.
12.Where
does
the
conversation
take
place?
A.In
a
company.
B.In
a
factory.
C.In
a
hospital.
13.Why
can’t
the
woman
sleep
well?
A.Because
she
has
been
working
too
hard.
B.Because
she
has
a
family
problem.
C.Because
she
has
a
high
fever.
14.What
does
the
doctor
suggest
that
the
woman
should
do?
A.She
should
take
some
medicine.
B.She
should
take
holidays.
C.She
should
change
a
job.
听第9段材料,回答第15至17题。
M:What
a
lot
of
rubbish
and
waste!
I
just
wonder
how
people
can
deal
with
these
things
every
day.
W:Don’t
worry.There
are
many
ways
of
dealing
with
them.The
other
day,I
heard
that
a
rubbish
plant
is
being
built
near
our
town.
M:A
rubbish
plant?To
produce
rubbish
or
to
deal
with
rubbish?
W:To
deal
with
rubbish,of
course.
M:How
much
rubbish
can
it
deal
with
every
day?
W:Maybe
3,000
tons,I
am
not
sure.
M:Our
town
will
become
cleaner
after
the
plant
is
built.
W:I
hope
so.
15.Where
is
the
plant
(工厂)
being
built?
A.Far
away
from
the
town.
B.Not
far
away
from
the
town.
C.North
of
the
town.
16.What
is
the
plant
built
for?
A.Producing
trucks.
B.Producing
rubbish.
C.Dealing
with
rubbish.
17.What
can
you
conclude
according
to
the
dialogue?
A.How
to
deal
with
rubbish
is
a
big
problem
in
their
town.
B.They
hope
that
another
rubbish
plant
will
be
set
up
in
their
town.
C.The
plant
can
at
least
deal
with
3,000
tons
of
rubbish
every
day.
听第10段材料,回答第18至20题。
You
ask
me
about
my
home
town,so
now
I’d
like
to
tell
you
something
about
it.I
live
in
Brighton,which
is
not
a
very
big
town.It
has
a
population
of
around
300,000.It
is
on
the
coast
about
50
miles
from
London.Of
course
it
isn’t
as
interesting
as
London
or
Paris.But
the
air
is
a
lot
cleaner
and
better.There
is
little
population
there.There
are
a
few
factories
in
Brighton,but
not
many.It
isn’t
very
easy
to
find
a
job
there.My
father
used
to
work
in
a
steel
plant
which
shut
down
a
year
ago
and
my
father
lost
his
job.But
there
are
a
lot
of
hotels
and
language
schools
in
the
town.In
summer
the
town
is
full
of
travellers.My
father
decides
to
open
a
small
shop
to
sell
gifts.But
he
is
short
of
money.He
hopes
that
he
can
borrow
some
money
from
the
bank.
18.Where
exactly
is
Brighton?
A.15
miles
from
London.
B.50
miles
from
London.
C.50
miles
from
Paris.
19.What’s
the
population
of
Brighton?
A.30,000.
B.130,000.
C.300,000.
20.Why
are
there
a
lot
of
hotels
in
Brighton?
A.Because
there
are
a
lot
of
workers.
B.Because
there
are
a
lot
of
students.
C.Because
there
are
a
lot
of
travellers.
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
Francis
Bacon,one
of
the
most
important
philosophers
(哲学家)
of
England,was
born
in
London
and
educated
at
Cambridge
University.When
he
was
only
15,he
went
to
France
to
work
for
the
English
ambassador
(大使).Two
years
later,he
went
up
to
England
to
study
law.At
the
age
of
twenty-three
he
was
chosen
to
parliament
(议会).His
ideas
about
how
scientists
should
study
things
in
nature
help
to
bring
the
modern
way
of
thinking,called
the
scientific
method.
One
of
the
Bacon’s
best-known
books
was
his
Essays.Each
essay
was
a
short
piece
of
writing
in
which
he
tried
to
give
a
lesson
by
discussing
sides
of
a
subject
such
as
studying,conversation,friends
and
healthful
living.In
many
of
his
books,Bacon
explained
how
scientists
should
study
things
as
they
really
exist
in
nature
and
then
try
to
figure
out
what
caused
a
particular
thing
to
be
as
it
was.Later,by
doing
experiments,the
scientist
could
see
that
any
cause
would
always
have
the
same
result.This
method,which
is
called
inductive
reasoning,is
used
by
all
the
scientists
today,but
it
was
new
in
Bacon’s
time.?
21.According
to
the
passage
we
know
that
　　　.?
A.Francis
Bacon
was
the
most
important
philosopher
of
England
B.Francis
Bacon
had
good
education
C.Francis
Bacon
worked
for
a
French
ambassador
at
the
age
of
15
D.Francis
Bacon
stayed
in
France
until
he
was
23
22.It
can
be
known
that
Francis
Bacon
was
famous
for　　　.?
A.inventing
the
scientific
method
of
studying
things
in
nature
B.his
books
C.his
Essays
and
his
education
D.being
a
member
of
parliament
23.Which
of
the
following
is
NOT
the
subject
of
Bacon’s
essays?
A.Studying.
B.Conversation.
C.Friends
and
healthful
living.
D.London.
24.The
underlined
phrase
“inductive
reasoning”
in
the
last
paragraph
means
“　　　”.?
A.to
discover
general
laws
from
particular
facts
or
examples
B.to
reach
a
conclusion
by
reasoning
from
general
laws
to
a
particular
case
C.to
study
things
as
they
used
to
be
D.to
study
things
in
a
particular
way
B
Do
you
suppose
Darwin,one
of
the
greatest
scientists
of
all
time,really
did
fools’
experiments?Or
did
he
do
experiments
that
were
so
simple
and
basic
that
other
people
just
thought
they
were
foolish?
Sometimes,people
think
they
already
know
the
answer
to
a
question
or
the
solution
(解决办法)
to
a
problem.Sometimes,they
really
do
know
an
answer
or
a
solution,but
without
thinking
they
are
important.
Charles
Darwin
didn’t
settle
for
(满足于)
just
thinking
he
knew
something.And,he
believed
all
things
could
be
important
however
simple
they
seemed
to
be.
Suppose
you
drop
sheets
of
paper
that
are
exactly
the
same
size
and
shape.If
you
drop
them
at
the
same
time
in
the
same
place,they
will
fall
in
the
same
way.Now
make
one
of
the
sheets
of
paper
into
a
tight
(紧的)
little
ball
and
let
it
drop
along
with
the
other
sheet.What
happens?You
have
done
an
experiment
that
is
so
simple
that
you
might
think
it
couldn’t
be
worth
anything.
But
this
simple
experiment
is
important.It
explains
part
of
our
present-day
understanding
of
physics,ideas
that
were
worked
out
long
ago
by
Galileo
and
Newton.And
these
understandings
set
aside
some
of
ancient
Greek
physics.?
Science
sometimes
stops
to
look
at
very
simple
things
and
to
think
very
hard
about
them.Even
the
simplest
idea,which
we
might
think
is
foolish,can
shake
the
foundations
of
science.
25.The
passage
tells
us
that
Charles
Darwin
　　　.?
A.was
a
great
English
scientist
B.always
liked
doing
the
experiments
that
others
thought
difficult
C.thought
even
the
simplest
thing
was
important
D.didn’t
get
well
with
others
26.The
underlined
phrase
“set
aside”
most
probably
means
　　　.?
A.throw
away
B.store
up
C.put
to
use
D.realize
27.The
author
of
the
passage
tries
to
　　　.?
A.convince
us
that
Charles
Darwin,Galileo
and
Newton
are
the
greatest
scientists
in
the
world
B.draw
the
conclusion
that
basic
sciences
are
simple
things
C.prove
that
two
sheets
of
paper,with
the
same
size
and
shape,will
fall
at
the
same
speed
D.draw
our
attention
to
everyday
happenings
around
us
28.Which
one
of
the
following
is
true?
A.Darwin
really
did
fools’
experiments.
B.According
to
some
people
Darwin
did
foolish
experiments.
C.It
is
believed
by
all
people
that
things
could
be
important
though
they
seemed
to
be
simple.
D.Galileo
and
Newton
worked
out
ancient
Greek
physics.
C
It
was
Christmas,1961.I
was
teaching
in
a
small
town
in
Ohio
where
my
third
graders
were
eagerly
waiting
for
the
great
day
of
giving
gifts.Each
day
the
children
made
something
new—strings
of
popcorn,hand-made
trinkets(小饰品)
and
bells
made
from
wallpaper,which
we
hung
from
the
ceiling.One
girl
was
just
watching.I
wondered
what
would
happen
to
this
child,once
so
happy,now
so
quiet.I
hoped
the
festivities
would
please
her,but
nothing
did.
We
made
cards
for
parents,for
sisters
and
brothers,for
grandparents,and
for
each
other.At
home
the
students
made
fried
marbles.So
I
made
each
of
my
students
a
little
bag
for
carrying
their
fried
marbles
home.
The
day
finally
came.We
were
all
excited
as
we
exchanged
the
presents.But
the
girl
just
sat
watching
quietly.I
had
made
a
special
bag
for
her.I
wanted
to
see
her
smile.She
opened
the
bag
carefully.I
waited,but
she
turned
away.?
After
school
the
children
left.I
was
sitting
down
in
a
chair
to
catch
my
breath,when
she
came
to
me
with
a
small
white
box
in
her
hands.
“For
me?”
I
asked
with
a
smile.She
nodded.I
opened
the
box.There
inside,a
fried
marble
hung
from
a
golden
chain.
In
a
flash
I
knew—she
had
make
it
for
her
mother,the
mother
she
would
never
see
again,the
mother
who
had
died
just
three
weeks
before.
I
held
out
the
chain.She
took
it
in
both
her
hands
and
put
it
on
my
neck.I
whispered,“Oh,Maria,it
is
so
beautiful.She
would
have
loved
it.”
Neither
of
us
could
stop
the
tears.She
ran
into
my
arms.And
for
that
moment
I
became
her
mother,for
she
had
given
me
the
greatest
gift
of
all:herself.
29.What
was
the
author
probably?
A.A
college
student.
B.A
middle
school
student.
C.A
kind
teacher.
D.A
famous
writer.
30.What
did
the
author
prepare
for
the
students?
A.Strings
of
popcorn.　　
B.Hand-made
trinkets.
C.Some
nice
bells.
D.Some
little
bags.
31.“The
day”
in
Paragraph
3
refers
to
　　　.?
A.New
Year’s
Day
B.Christmas
Day
C.Graduation
Day
D.Mother’s
Day
32.Why
was
the
girl
not
as
pleased
as
other
children?
A.Because
she
couldn’t
make
anything.
B.Because
her
family
was
very
poor.
C.Because
she
thought
of
her
mother
who
had
died.
D.Because
she
didn’t
want
to
give
others
any
gifts.
D
The
most
important
day
Helen
Keller
remembered
in
all
her
life
was
the
one
on
which
her
teacher,Anne
Sullivan,came
to
her.It
was
three
months
before
she
was
seven
years
old.
On
the
afternoon
of
that
day,Helen
knew
that
something
was
happening.She
went
outside
and
waited
at
the
door
of
the
house.She
could
feel
the
sun
on
her
face
and
she
could
touch
the
leaves
of
the
plants.Then
she
felt
someone
walking
towards
her.She
thought
it
was
her
mother
and
she
went
to
her
and
held
her
close.This
was
the
teacher
who
had
come
to
teach
all
things
to
her
and,above
all,to
love
her.
The
next
morning,the
teacher
took
her
into
her
room
and
gave
her
a
doll.When
Helen
was
playing
with
it,Miss
Sullivan
slowly
spelled
the
word
“d-o-l-l”
onto
her
hand.Helen
learnt
a
lot
of
words
like
this.After
the
teacher
had
been
with
her
for
several
weeks,Helen
understood
that
everything
had
a
name.
One
day
Helen
didn’t
understand
the
difference
between
“mug”
and
“water”.She
became
angry
and
threw
the
doll
on
the
floor.In
her
quiet,dark
world
she
didn’t
feel
sorry
for
doing
it.Then
her
teacher
took
her
out
into
the
warm
sunshine.They
walked
down
to
the
well
where
someone
was
drawing
water.Her
teacher
put
her
hand
under
the
water
and
spelled
the
word
“w-a-t-e-r”
at
the
same
time
in
her
other
hand.Suddenly,Helen
felt
an
understanding.She
knew
then
that
“w-a-t-e-r”
was
the
wonderful
cool
something
flowing
over
her
hand.That
living
word
awakened
her
spirit,gave
it
light,hope,fun
and
set
it
free!
33.How
was
the
girl
different
from
other
children?
A.She
didn’t
know
how
to
play
games.
B.She
was
angry
all
the
time.
C.She
couldn’t
speak.
D.She
was
deaf
and
blind.
34.Helen
learnt
new
words
when
　　　.?
A.she
went
to
the
well
B.Miss
Sullivan
spelled
them
on
her
hand
C.the
teacher
gave
her
a
doll
D.she
knew
the
difference
between
two
words
35.What
can
the
reader
learn
from
the
passage?
A.How
to
spell
different
words
and
understand
their
meanings.
B.The
way
to
feel
sorry
for
doing
something
wrong.
C.The
idea
of
how
to
describe
things
and
make
them
feel
real.
D.When
someone
is
drawing
water,we
should
go
to
feel
it.
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
　36　This
is
a
very
frightening
number.Most
of
the
time,it
will
not
be
noticed
until
it
becomes
a
large
problem.Yet,hopefully,more
and
more
people
are
learning
about
it.Parents
as
well
as
friends
should
pay
attention
to
these
things
and
other
things
such
as:?
Sudden
changes
in
their
mood,appetite
or
weight
can
be
indications
of
depression.While
these
things
can
also
happen
to
an
adolescent,when
it
is
followed
by
other
conditions,it
should
be
taken
note
of.
A
loss
of
interest
in
doing
the
things
that
they
used
to
love
to
do
can
be
depression.Now,this
is
not
necessarily
something
from
their
childhood,but
something
within
the
past
few
months.
　37　For
example,divorce
or
separation
of
their
parents,death,or
even
just
friendship.Often,teens
blame
themselves
for
these
conditions.?
　38　If
they
do
not
seem
happy
any
more,there
must
be
something
troubling
them.?
　39　There
are
many
sad
stories
of
young
teens
harming
themselves
because
they
are
suffering
from
depression
and
no
one
took
notice.?
Finally,to
our
joy,those
teens
that
do
get
timely
treatment
for
their
depression
can
actually
recover
quickly
and
completely
and
get
back
into
doing
the
things
they
used
to
love
to
do.Talk
to
your
doctor
if
you
feel
that
you
have
been
in
any
of
these
conditions
or
you
know
someone
that
is.　40　?
So
learn
more
about
teen
depression
and
depression
in
general
and
get
help
now
or
help
a
friend
in
need.
A.They
can
decide
what
is
happening,and
get
life
back
on
track
to
you.
B.Because
of
depression
and
lack
of
notice,many
sad
and
painful
cases
happen
to
young
teens.
C.A
lack
of
emotion
is
a
sign
that
something
is
definitely
wrong.
D.One
thing
that
must
be
said
about
teen
depression
is
that
this
is
a
serious
condition.
E.Sad
situations
can
cause
teen
depression
to
appear
fast.
F.Teen
depression
makes
up
one
in
five
children.
G.There
are
many
ways
to
deal
with
depression.
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
LeBron
James
isn’t
the
first
high
school
basketball
player
to
go
straight
into
the
NBA,but
he’s
probably
the
best.He
has
the
body,skills
and
the
basketball
brain
of
an
All-Star(全明星球员).
This
　41　
was
on
show
as
he
scored
41
points
to
take
Cleveland
Cavaliers(克里夫兰骑士队)
to
a
107-104
　42　
over
the
New
Jersey
Nets
(新泽西网队)
on
March
28.Aged
of
19
years
and
87
days,James
became
the
　43　
player
to
score
40
or
more
in
the
NBA.“It
was
by
far
James’
best
　44　,”
said
Cleveland
coach
Paul
Silas.Known
to
his
friends
　45　
“the
king”,this
was
the
day
James
earned
his
crown(王冠).But
he
was
　46　
from
being
a
king
during
a
childhood
spent
in
the
back
streets
of
Akron,Ohio.　47　
many
other
African-American
basketball
players,James’
early
years
were
a
　48　.His
mother
Gloria
was
just
16
when
she
gave
birth
to
him;he
knows
nothing
about
his
father.Mother
and
son
battled
for
everything
from
food
to
a
place
to
live.　49　
help
from
his
grandmother
and
neighbours,James
would
　50　
have
died
when
he
was
young.?
This
spirit
of
survival
has
served
him
well
on
court,forcing
him
to
take
any
　51　
he
finds.“I
　52　
losing;I
don’t
like
losing,”
said
James
of
his
41-point
display.“I
　53　
the
opportunity
for
us
to
win
and
I
was
　54　
to
capture
it.”
At
2.03
metres,he
is
no
Yao
Ming
but
this
didn’t
　55　
him
being
first
choice
in
2003
NBA
draft.This
was
　56　
to
his
strength
and
skill,much
of
which
he
learned
from
high
school
American
football.?
Although
he
has
a
　57　
brain,James
has
never
had
to
concentrate
on
　58　.Some
people
think
this
is
a
mistake
and
say
he
should
have
gone
to
college
to
　59　
his
mind.But
James
is
one
of
the
lucky
few
who
has
found
fame
and
fortune
　60　
a
diploma(文凭).On
the
court,he
is
king.?
41.A.action　　　　　　　　B.performance
C.activity
D.talent
42.A.beat
B.win
C.defeat
D.equal
43.A.oldest
B.strongest
C.tallest
D.youngest
44.A.performance
B.lesson
C.action
D.appearance
45.A.for
B.as
C.by
D.with
46.A.well
B.far
C.deep
D.late
47.A.As
B.Like
C.Likely
D.Alike
48.A.fight
B.struggle
C.battle
D.war
49.A.Except
for
B.Except
C.Besides
D.Without
50.A.certainly
B.impossible
C.hardly
D.probably
51.A.goal
B.game
C.match
D.chance
52.A.hate
B.refuse
C.object
D.reject
53.A.looked
B.seized
C.went
D.held
54.A.afraid
B.unlucky
C.able
D.certain
55.A.keep
B.forbid
C.protect
D.stop
56.A.according
B.referring
C.thanks
D.sticking
57.A.fast
B.quick
C.high
D.top
58.A.studying
B.resting
C.sleeping
D.eating
59.A.advance
B.march
C.increase
D.develop
60.A.apart
from
B.but
C.except
D.without
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
It
is
difficult
for
most
parents
to
teach
their
children
to
be
61.　　　　　　　　　(responsibility)
for
housework,but
with
one
of
the
following
suggestions,you
really
can
get
your
children
62.　　　　　　　　　(help)
at
home.?
If
you
give
your
children
the
impression
that
they
cannot
do
anything
quite
right,then
they
63.　　　　　　　　　(regard)
themselves
as
unfit
or
unable
persons.64.　　　　　　　
the
children
believe
that
they
can
succeed,they
will
never
become
65.　　　　　　　　(total)
independent.?
My
daughter
Carla’s
fifth-grade
teacher
made
every
child
in
her
class
special.When
students
received
66.　　　　　(little)
than
a
perfect
test
score,she
would
point
out
67.
they
had
mastered
and
declare
firmly
they
could
learn
what
they
had
missed.?
You
can
use
the
same
technique
when
you
evaluate
68.(you)
child’s
work
at
home.Don’t
always
scold
but
give
lots
of
praise
instead.Talk
about
what
he
has
done
right,not
about
what
he
hasn’t.If
a
difficult
task
has
been
done
right
by
your
child,promise
him
69.　　　　　　　　
Sunday
trip
or
a
ball
game
with
Dad.?
Learning
is
a
process
of
trying,failing,trying
and
succeeding.If
you
teach
your
children
not
to
fear
a
mistake
or
failure,they
will
learn
faster
and
achieve
70.(successful)
at
last.
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
After
school
I
went
to
home
for
supper.When
I
got
home,I
found
my
mother
laying
in
bed.She
was
ill.Unluckily,my
father
was
away
from
home
in
business.“What
shall
I
do?”
I
thought
to
me.Since
Mother
was
ill,I
must
take
well
care
of
her.So
I
decided
to
try
cooking
by
myself.I
did
the
cooking
with
great
difficulty
but
it
got
burnt
at
last.I
had
thought
Mother
would
never
like.To
my
joy,Mother
praised
me
for
the
meat
I
have
cooked.She
said,“It
tastes
delicious.I’m
very
pleasing
with
it.”
I
knew
Mother
was
encouraging
us
to
do
more
by
myself.
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
莫言,中国著名作家,原名管谟业,曾多次获得各种奖项。2012年10月获得了诺贝尔文学奖(The
Nobel
Prize
in
Literature)。请根据下列提示用英语写一篇关于他的约100词的简介。可适当增加细节,以使行文连贯。
1955年2月
出生于山东潍坊
2011年
作品《蛙(The
Frog)》获得茅盾文学奖(The
Mao
Dun
Prize
in
Literature)
2012年10月
获得诺贝尔文学奖,作为一名喜欢写作的人,为他感到骄傲
Mo
Yan
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
第五单元测评
答案
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
M:Sorry,I
have
forgotten
John’s
address.
W:You
forgot
again!
It’s
1343
Street.
1.What’s
John’s
address?
A.1434
Street.
B.1344
Street.
C.1343
Street.
答案:C
M:I
need
some
stamps
and
some
envelopes
as
well.
W:Will
you
step
right
over
to
the
second
window,please?
2.Where
is
the
conversation
probably
taking
place?
A.On
a
bus.
B.On
the
steps.
C.In
a
post
office.
答案:C
M:Your
skirt
is
quite
beautiful
in
colour,isn’t
it?
W:Yes,I
bought
it
at
a
sale
for
half
price.It
cost
me
$12.
3.How
much
should
the
skirt
have
cost?
A.$24.　　　
　B.$12.　　
　　C.$6.
答案:A
M:I
hope
I
can
see
you
at
my
birthday
party.
W:Oh,dear,I’ve
almost
forgotten.When
is
it?
M:Well,the
day
after
April
Fools’
Day.Easy
to
remember,isn’t
it?
4.When
is
the
man’s
birthday?
A.April
1st.
B.April
2nd.
C.April
3rd.
答案:B
M:I
hear
you
are
going
to
drive
to
New
York
this
weekend.
W:Oh,I’ve
changed
my
mind.
M:What?
W:I
think
flying
will
be
more
comfortable.
5.How
will
the
woman
get
to
New
York?
A.By
car.
B.By
train.
C.By
airplane.
答案:C
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6至8题。
M:Excuse
me,madam.I’m
wondering
if
you
could
tell
me
the
place
where
I
can
repair
my
shoes?
W:There’s
one
on
the
Fifth
Street.
M:Thank
you,but
how
far
is
it
to
that
store?
W:Not
very
far
and
it
is
not
difficult
to
find.Just
keep
walking
and
after
two
blocks
you
will
see
a
supermarket
on
your
left.The
store
is
next
to
the
supermarket.
M:Oh,thank
you
very
much.
W:You’re
welcome.You
won’t
miss
it,young
man.
6.What
does
the
man
want
to
do?
A.To
have
his
shoes
mended.
B.To
buy
a
pair
of
new
shoes.
C.To
do
the
shopping
in
a
supermarket.
答案:A
7.How
far
is
the
supermarket?
A.Two
blocks
away.
B.Five
blocks
away.
C.Six
blocks
away.
答案:A
8.How
will
the
man
get
to
the
place?
A.By
bus.
B.On
foot.
C.In
his
car.
答案:B
听第7段材料,回答第9至11题。
M:What’s
the
matter,Alice?
W:Sorry,Mr
Harrison.I
missed
my
train.
M:Why
did
you
miss
your
train?
W:Because
I
left
home
a
little
late.
M:Did
you
get
up
late
or
something?
W:No.My
aunt
called
me
at
the
last
minute.
M:Tell
her
not
to
call
you
in
the
morning.
W:I
will,Mr
Harrison.I’m
really
sorry
for
being
late.
M:If
you
are
late
again,I
won’t
let
you
pass
for
this
class.
9.What’s
the
relationship
(关系)
between
the
two
speakers?
A.Secretary
and
boss.
B.Teacher
and
student.
C.Doctor
and
patient.
答案:B
10.Why
was
she
late?
A.Her
aunt
called
her
to
get
up
late.
B.She
missed
the
bus.
C.She
got
a
telephone
call.
答案:C
11.What
can
we
know
about
the
teacher?
A.He
is
strict
with
his
students.
B.He
is
cold
to
his
students.
C.He
gets
angry
easily.
答案:A
听第8段材料,回答第12至14题。
M:What
seems
to
be
the
matter?
W:I
just
can’t
sleep
well,doctor.
M:I
see.And
how
long
have
you
had
this
problem?
W:Oh,for
about
two
weeks
now.
M:Two
weeks.Do
you
have
headaches?
W:Sometimes.
M:Fever?
W:No.
M:Are
you
having
any
family
problems?
W:No,not
really.We
all
get
along
pretty
well.
M:And
how
about
your
work?
W:Well,I’ve
been
working
a
lot
lately—more
than
11
hours
a
day.
M:Maybe
you
should
take
a
vacation
and
just
rest
for
a
few
days.
W:Well,I
can’t
right
now.We’re
in
the
middle
of
some
important
business.
M:Yes,I
understand,but
you
really
need
to
slow
down.You’re
going
to
kill
yourself
if
you
go
on
like
this.
12.Where
does
the
conversation
take
place?
A.In
a
company.
B.In
a
factory.
C.In
a
hospital.
答案:C
13.Why
can’t
the
woman
sleep
well?
A.Because
she
has
been
working
too
hard.
B.Because
she
has
a
family
problem.
C.Because
she
has
a
high
fever.
答案:A
14.What
does
the
doctor
suggest
that
the
woman
should
do?
A.She
should
take
some
medicine.
B.She
should
take
holidays.
C.She
should
change
a
job.
答案:B
听第9段材料,回答第15至17题。
M:What
a
lot
of
rubbish
and
waste!
I
just
wonder
how
people
can
deal
with
these
things
every
day.
W:Don’t
worry.There
are
many
ways
of
dealing
with
them.The
other
day,I
heard
that
a
rubbish
plant
is
being
built
near
our
town.
M:A
rubbish
plant?To
produce
rubbish
or
to
deal
with
rubbish?
W:To
deal
with
rubbish,of
course.
M:How
much
rubbish
can
it
deal
with
every
day?
W:Maybe
3,000
tons,I
am
not
sure.
M:Our
town
will
become
cleaner
after
the
plant
is
built.
W:I
hope
so.
15.Where
is
the
plant
(工厂)
being
built?
A.Far
away
from
the
town.
B.Not
far
away
from
the
town.
C.North
of
the
town.
答案:B
16.What
is
the
plant
built
for?
A.Producing
trucks.
B.Producing
rubbish.
C.Dealing
with
rubbish.
答案:C
17.What
can
you
conclude
according
to
the
dialogue?
A.How
to
deal
with
rubbish
is
a
big
problem
in
their
town.
B.They
hope
that
another
rubbish
plant
will
be
set
up
in
their
town.
C.The
plant
can
at
least
deal
with
3,000
tons
of
rubbish
every
day.
答案:C
听第10段材料,回答第18至20题。
You
ask
me
about
my
home
town,so
now
I’d
like
to
tell
you
something
about
it.I
live
in
Brighton,which
is
not
a
very
big
town.It
has
a
population
of
around
300,000.It
is
on
the
coast
about
50
miles
from
London.Of
course
it
isn’t
as
interesting
as
London
or
Paris.But
the
air
is
a
lot
cleaner
and
better.There
is
little
population
there.There
are
a
few
factories
in
Brighton,but
not
many.It
isn’t
very
easy
to
find
a
job
there.My
father
used
to
work
in
a
steel
plant
which
shut
down
a
year
ago
and
my
father
lost
his
job.But
there
are
a
lot
of
hotels
and
language
schools
in
the
town.In
summer
the
town
is
full
of
travellers.My
father
decides
to
open
a
small
shop
to
sell
gifts.But
he
is
short
of
money.He
hopes
that
he
can
borrow
some
money
from
the
bank.
18.Where
exactly
is
Brighton?
A.15
miles
from
London.
B.50
miles
from
London.
C.50
miles
from
Paris.
答案:B
19.What’s
the
population
of
Brighton?
A.30,000.
B.130,000.
C.300,000.
答案:C
20.Why
are
there
a
lot
of
hotels
in
Brighton?
A.Because
there
are
a
lot
of
workers.
B.Because
there
are
a
lot
of
students.
C.Because
there
are
a
lot
of
travellers.
答案:C
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
Francis
Bacon,one
of
the
most
important
philosophers
(哲学家)
of
England,was
born
in
London
and
educated
at
Cambridge
University.When
he
was
only
15,he
went
to
France
to
work
for
the
English
ambassador
(大使).Two
years
later,he
went
up
to
England
to
study
law.At
the
age
of
twenty-three
he
was
chosen
to
parliament
(议会).His
ideas
about
how
scientists
should
study
things
in
nature
help
to
bring
the
modern
way
of
thinking,called
the
scientific
method.
One
of
the
Bacon’s
best-known
books
was
his
Essays.Each
essay
was
a
short
piece
of
writing
in
which
he
tried
to
give
a
lesson
by
discussing
sides
of
a
subject
such
as
studying,conversation,friends
and
healthful
living.In
many
of
his
books,Bacon
explained
how
scientists
should
study
things
as
they
really
exist
in
nature
and
then
try
to
figure
out
what
caused
a
particular
thing
to
be
as
it
was.Later,by
doing
experiments,the
scientist
could
see
that
any
cause
would
always
have
the
same
result.This
method,which
is
called
inductive
reasoning,is
used
by
all
the
scientists
today,but
it
was
new
in
Bacon’s
time.?
21.According
to
the
passage
we
know
that
　　　.?
A.Francis
Bacon
was
the
most
important
philosopher
of
England
B.Francis
Bacon
had
good
education
C.Francis
Bacon
worked
for
a
French
ambassador
at
the
age
of
15
D.Francis
Bacon
stayed
in
France
until
he
was
23
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。根据第一段第一句可知,培根是在剑桥大学接受的教育,从而可知他受过良好的教育。本题也可用排除法选出正确答案,由文中的“one
of
the
most
important
philosophers(哲学家)”可把A项排除;由“he
went
to
France
to
work
for
the
English
ambassador(大使)”可把C项排除;由“Two
years
later,he
went
up
to
England
to
study
law.”可知培根17岁就回到了英国学习法律,因此D项是错误的。故选B项。
22.It
can
be
known
that
Francis
Bacon
was
famous
for　　　.?
A.inventing
the
scientific
method
of
studying
things
in
nature
B.his
books
C.his
Essays
and
his
education
D.being
a
member
of
parliament
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。由短文第二段的第一句“One
of
the
Bacon’s
best-known
books
was
his
Essays.”可知培根因为他的书籍而出名。
23.Which
of
the
following
is
NOT
the
subject
of
Bacon’s
essays?
A.Studying.
B.Conversation.
C.Friends
and
healthful
living.
D.London.
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。由第二段的“Each
essay
was
a
short
piece
of
writing
in
which
he
tried
to
give
a
lesson
by
discussing
sides
of
a
subject
such
as
studying,conversation,friends
and
healthful
living.”可知,答案为D项。
24.The
underlined
phrase
“inductive
reasoning”
in
the
last
paragraph
means
“　　　”.?
A.to
discover
general
laws
from
particular
facts
or
examples
B.to
reach
a
conclusion
by
reasoning
from
general
laws
to
a
particular
case
C.to
study
things
as
they
used
to
be
D.to
study
things
in
a
particular
way
答案:A
解析:词义猜测题。由该词组所在句的上一句“Later,by
doing
experiments,the
scientist
could
see
that
any
cause
would
always
have
the
same
result.”可推知答案为A项。
B
Do
you
suppose
Darwin,one
of
the
greatest
scientists
of
all
time,really
did
fools’
experiments?Or
did
he
do
experiments
that
were
so
simple
and
basic
that
other
people
just
thought
they
were
foolish?
Sometimes,people
think
they
already
know
the
answer
to
a
question
or
the
solution
(解决办法)
to
a
problem.Sometimes,they
really
do
know
an
answer
or
a
solution,but
without
thinking
they
are
important.
Charles
Darwin
didn’t
settle
for
(满足于)
just
thinking
he
knew
something.And,he
believed
all
things
could
be
important
however
simple
they
seemed
to
be.
Suppose
you
drop
sheets
of
paper
that
are
exactly
the
same
size
and
shape.If
you
drop
them
at
the
same
time
in
the
same
place,they
will
fall
in
the
same
way.Now
make
one
of
the
sheets
of
paper
into
a
tight
(紧的)
little
ball
and
let
it
drop
along
with
the
other
sheet.What
happens?You
have
done
an
experiment
that
is
so
simple
that
you
might
think
it
couldn’t
be
worth
anything.
But
this
simple
experiment
is
important.It
explains
part
of
our
present-day
understanding
of
physics,ideas
that
were
worked
out
long
ago
by
Galileo
and
Newton.And
these
understandings
set
aside
some
of
ancient
Greek
physics.?
Science
sometimes
stops
to
look
at
very
simple
things
and
to
think
very
hard
about
them.Even
the
simplest
idea,which
we
might
think
is
foolish,can
shake
the
foundations
of
science.
25.The
passage
tells
us
that
Charles
Darwin
　　　.?
A.was
a
great
English
scientist
B.always
liked
doing
the
experiments
that
others
thought
difficult
C.thought
even
the
simplest
thing
was
important
D.didn’t
get
well
with
others
答案:C
解析:推理判断题。短文并没有说起
Charles
Darwin是哪个国家的科学家,可排除A项;由第三段可知别人认为Darwin的许多实验不值得做,可把B项排除;文中没有论述Darwin与人相处的事情,可排除D项。由第三段中的“he
believed
all
things
could
be
important
however
simple
they
seemed
to
be.”可推出答案为C项。
26.The
underlined
phrase
“set
aside”
most
probably
means
　　　.?
A.throw
away
B.store
up
C.put
to
use
D.realize
答案:A
解析:词义猜测题。由上文可知作者认为做这个简单实验是重要的,它解释了目前人们对于物理方面的理解。因此这些理解当然是推翻了一些希腊物理学的观点。由此可推知set
aside与throw
away同义。
27.The
author
of
the
passage
tries
to
　　　.?
A.convince
us
that
Charles
Darwin,Galileo
and
Newton
are
the
greatest
scientists
in
the
world
B.draw
the
conclusion
that
basic
sciences
are
simple
things
C.prove
that
two
sheets
of
paper,with
the
same
size
and
shape,will
fall
at
the
same
speed
D.draw
our
attention
to
everyday
happenings
around
us
答案:D
解析:主旨大意题。短文的最后一段点明最简单的事情都可能摇动科学的根基,意在告诉读者要留意身边的每一件事,哪怕它非常简单。
28.Which
one
of
the
following
is
true?
A.Darwin
really
did
fools’
experiments.
B.According
to
some
people
Darwin
did
foolish
experiments.
C.It
is
believed
by
all
people
that
things
could
be
important
though
they
seemed
to
be
simple.
D.Galileo
and
Newton
worked
out
ancient
Greek
physics.
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。短文第一段第二句“Or
did
he
do
experiments
that
were
so
simple
and
basic
that
other
people
just
thought
they
were
foolish?”明确告诉我们有些人认为Darwin做了愚蠢的实验。
C
It
was
Christmas,1961.I
was
teaching
in
a
small
town
in
Ohio
where
my
third
graders
were
eagerly
waiting
for
the
great
day
of
giving
gifts.Each
day
the
children
made
something
new—strings
of
popcorn,hand-made
trinkets(小饰品)
and
bells
made
from
wallpaper,which
we
hung
from
the
ceiling.One
girl
was
just
watching.I
wondered
what
would
happen
to
this
child,once
so
happy,now
so
quiet.I
hoped
the
festivities
would
please
her,but
nothing
did.
We
made
cards
for
parents,for
sisters
and
brothers,for
grandparents,and
for
each
other.At
home
the
students
made
fried
marbles.So
I
made
each
of
my
students
a
little
bag
for
carrying
their
fried
marbles
home.
The
day
finally
came.We
were
all
excited
as
we
exchanged
the
presents.But
the
girl
just
sat
watching
quietly.I
had
made
a
special
bag
for
her.I
wanted
to
see
her
smile.She
opened
the
bag
carefully.I
waited,but
she
turned
away.?
After
school
the
children
left.I
was
sitting
down
in
a
chair
to
catch
my
breath,when
she
came
to
me
with
a
small
white
box
in
her
hands.
“For
me?”
I
asked
with
a
smile.She
nodded.I
opened
the
box.There
inside,a
fried
marble
hung
from
a
golden
chain.
In
a
flash
I
knew—she
had
make
it
for
her
mother,the
mother
she
would
never
see
again,the
mother
who
had
died
just
three
weeks
before.
I
held
out
the
chain.She
took
it
in
both
her
hands
and
put
it
on
my
neck.I
whispered,“Oh,Maria,it
is
so
beautiful.She
would
have
loved
it.”
Neither
of
us
could
stop
the
tears.She
ran
into
my
arms.And
for
that
moment
I
became
her
mother,for
she
had
given
me
the
greatest
gift
of
all:herself.
29.What
was
the
author
probably?
A.A
college
student.
B.A
middle
school
student.
C.A
kind
teacher.
D.A
famous
writer.
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。由第一段第二句“I
was
teaching
in
a
small
town
in
Ohio
where
my
third
graders
were
eagerly
waiting
for
the
great
day
of
giving
gifts.”可知,作者是一名教师。
30.What
did
the
author
prepare
for
the
students?
A.Strings
of
popcorn.　　
B.Hand-made
trinkets.
C.Some
nice
bells.
D.Some
little
bags.
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。由第二段的最后一句“So
I
made
each
of
my
students
a
little
bag
for
carrying
their
fried
marbles
home.”可知作者为学生准备的是little
bags。
31.“The
day”
in
Paragraph
3
refers
to
　　　.?
A.New
Year’s
Day
B.Christmas
Day
C.Graduation
Day
D.Mother’s
Day
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。由第一段中的“It
was
Christmas,1961.”可知,此处的The
day指的是圣诞节。
32.Why
was
the
girl
not
as
pleased
as
other
children?
A.Because
she
couldn’t
make
anything.
B.Because
her
family
was
very
poor.
C.Because
she
thought
of
her
mother
who
had
died.
D.Because
she
didn’t
want
to
give
others
any
gifts.
答案:C
解析:推理判断题。由文章最后两段可知,小女孩送给作者的礼物正是她为自己已死去的妈妈制作的。由此可推出小女孩之所以不开心,是因为圣诞节的到来让她想起了妈妈。
D
The
most
important
day
Helen
Keller
remembered
in
all
her
life
was
the
one
on
which
her
teacher,Anne
Sullivan,came
to
her.It
was
three
months
before
she
was
seven
years
old.
On
the
afternoon
of
that
day,Helen
knew
that
something
was
happening.She
went
outside
and
waited
at
the
door
of
the
house.She
could
feel
the
sun
on
her
face
and
she
could
touch
the
leaves
of
the
plants.Then
she
felt
someone
walking
towards
her.She
thought
it
was
her
mother
and
she
went
to
her
and
held
her
close.This
was
the
teacher
who
had
come
to
teach
all
things
to
her
and,above
all,to
love
her.
The
next
morning,the
teacher
took
her
into
her
room
and
gave
her
a
doll.When
Helen
was
playing
with
it,Miss
Sullivan
slowly
spelled
the
word
“d-o-l-l”
onto
her
hand.Helen
learnt
a
lot
of
words
like
this.After
the
teacher
had
been
with
her
for
several
weeks,Helen
understood
that
everything
had
a
name.
One
day
Helen
didn’t
understand
the
difference
between
“mug”
and
“water”.She
became
angry
and
threw
the
doll
on
the
floor.In
her
quiet,dark
world
she
didn’t
feel
sorry
for
doing
it.Then
her
teacher
took
her
out
into
the
warm
sunshine.They
walked
down
to
the
well
where
someone
was
drawing
water.Her
teacher
put
her
hand
under
the
water
and
spelled
the
word
“w-a-t-e-r”
at
the
same
time
in
her
other
hand.Suddenly,Helen
felt
an
understanding.She
knew
then
that
“w-a-t-e-r”
was
the
wonderful
cool
something
flowing
over
her
hand.That
living
word
awakened
her
spirit,gave
it
light,hope,fun
and
set
it
free!
33.How
was
the
girl
different
from
other
children?
A.She
didn’t
know
how
to
play
games.
B.She
was
angry
all
the
time.
C.She
couldn’t
speak.
D.She
was
deaf
and
blind.
答案:D
解析:推理判断题。根据文章第二段中一直强调她要靠触觉感受周围的东西,可推断她是一个聋哑人,故D项正确。
34.Helen
learnt
new
words
when
　　　.?
A.she
went
to
the
well
B.Miss
Sullivan
spelled
them
on
her
hand
C.the
teacher
gave
her
a
doll
D.she
knew
the
difference
between
two
words
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。根据文章第三段中的“Miss
Sullivan
slowly
spelled
the
word
‘d-o-l-l’
onto
her
hand.Helen
learnt
a
lot
of
words
like
this.”可知B项正确。
35.What
can
the
reader
learn
from
the
passage?
A.How
to
spell
different
words
and
understand
their
meanings.
B.The
way
to
feel
sorry
for
doing
something
wrong.
C.The
idea
of
how
to
describe
things
and
make
them
feel
real.
D.When
someone
is
drawing
water,we
should
go
to
feel
it.
答案:C
解析:推理判断题。文章介绍了海伦·凯勒是如何在自己是聋哑的情况下去学习和感知世界的,故选C项。
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
　36　This
is
a
very
frightening
number.Most
of
the
time,it
will
not
be
noticed
until
it
becomes
a
large
problem.Yet,hopefully,more
and
more
people
are
learning
about
it.Parents
as
well
as
friends
should
pay
attention
to
these
things
and
other
things
such
as:?
Sudden
changes
in
their
mood,appetite
or
weight
can
be
indications
of
depression.While
these
things
can
also
happen
to
an
adolescent,when
it
is
followed
by
other
conditions,it
should
be
taken
note
of.
A
loss
of
interest
in
doing
the
things
that
they
used
to
love
to
do
can
be
depression.Now,this
is
not
necessarily
something
from
their
childhood,but
something
within
the
past
few
months.
　37　For
example,divorce
or
separation
of
their
parents,death,or
even
just
friendship.Often,teens
blame
themselves
for
these
conditions.?
　38　If
they
do
not
seem
happy
any
more,there
must
be
something
troubling
them.?
　39　There
are
many
sad
stories
of
young
teens
harming
themselves
because
they
are
suffering
from
depression
and
no
one
took
notice.?
Finally,to
our
joy,those
teens
that
do
get
timely
treatment
for
their
depression
can
actually
recover
quickly
and
completely
and
get
back
into
doing
the
things
they
used
to
love
to
do.Talk
to
your
doctor
if
you
feel
that
you
have
been
in
any
of
these
conditions
or
you
know
someone
that
is.　40　?
So
learn
more
about
teen
depression
and
depression
in
general
and
get
help
now
or
help
a
friend
in
need.
A.They
can
decide
what
is
happening,and
get
life
back
on
track
to
you.
B.Because
of
depression
and
lack
of
notice,many
sad
and
painful
cases
happen
to
young
teens.
C.A
lack
of
emotion
is
a
sign
that
something
is
definitely
wrong.
D.One
thing
that
must
be
said
about
teen
depression
is
that
this
is
a
serious
condition.
E.Sad
situations
can
cause
teen
depression
to
appear
fast.
F.Teen
depression
makes
up
one
in
five
children.
G.There
are
many
ways
to
deal
with
depression.
答案:36~40
FECDA
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
LeBron
James
isn’t
the
first
high
school
basketball
player
to
go
straight
into
the
NBA,but
he’s
probably
the
best.He
has
the
body,skills
and
the
basketball
brain
of
an
All-Star(全明星球员).
This
　41　
was
on
show
as
he
scored
41
points
to
take
Cleveland
Cavaliers(克里夫兰骑士队)
to
a
107-104
　42　
over
the
New
Jersey
Nets
(新泽西网队)
on
March
28.Aged
of
19
years
and
87
days,James
became
the
　43　
player
to
score
40
or
more
in
the
NBA.“It
was
by
far
James’
best
　44　,”
said
Cleveland
coach
Paul
Silas.Known
to
his
friends
　45　
“the
king”,this
was
the
day
James
earned
his
crown(王冠).But
he
was
　46　
from
being
a
king
during
a
childhood
spent
in
the
back
streets
of
Akron,Ohio.　47　
many
other
African-American
basketball
players,James’
early
years
were
a
　48　.His
mother
Gloria
was
just
16
when
she
gave
birth
to
him;he
knows
nothing
about
his
father.Mother
and
son
battled
for
everything
from
food
to
a
place
to
live.　49　
help
from
his
grandmother
and
neighbours,James
would
　50　
have
died
when
he
was
young.?
This
spirit
of
survival
has
served
him
well
on
court,forcing
him
to
take
any
　51　
he
finds.“I
　52　
losing;I
don’t
like
losing,”
said
James
of
his
41-point
display.“I
　53　
the
opportunity
for
us
to
win
and
I
was
　54　
to
capture
it.”
At
2.03
metres,he
is
no
Yao
Ming
but
this
didn’t
　55　
him
being
first
choice
in
2003
NBA
draft.This
was
　56　
to
his
strength
and
skill,much
of
which
he
learned
from
high
school
American
football.?
Although
he
has
a
　57　
brain,James
has
never
had
to
concentrate
on
　58　.Some
people
think
this
is
a
mistake
and
say
he
should
have
gone
to
college
to
　59　
his
mind.But
James
is
one
of
the
lucky
few
who
has
found
fame
and
fortune
　60　
a
diploma(文凭).On
the
court,he
is
king.?
41.A.action　　　　　　　　B.performance
C.activity
D.talent
答案:D
解析:从全文可以得知勒布朗·詹姆斯是打篮球方面的天才,故选talent。
42.A.beat
B.win
C.defeat
D.equal
答案:B
解析:beat和defeat表示“击败”,不与over连用,直接用某人或球队等作宾语;win
over表示“胜过,战胜”;equal“与……相等,平等”。
43.A.oldest
B.strongest
C.tallest
D.youngest
答案:D
解析:由上文提到的“19岁87天”反推该空强调詹姆斯最年轻。
44.A.performance
B.lesson
C.action
D.appearance
答案:A
解析:一场比赛个人得41分是他迄今为止最好的表现。
45.A.for
B.as
C.by
D.with
答案:B
解析:be
known
as...“作为……是有名的”。
46.A.well
B.far
C.deep
D.late
答案:B
解析:由下文介绍的他童年时期不幸的生活反推,那时他还远不是一个球王。
47.A.As
B.Like
C.Likely
D.Alike
答案:B
解析:分析语境可知,该空表示“像……一样”,故应填Like。
48.A.fight
B.struggle
C.battle
D.war
答案:B
解析:由下文所介绍的他童年不幸的生活可知,詹姆斯的童年生活是一种挣扎。
49.A.Except
for
B.Except
C.Besides
D.Without
答案:D
解析:从句意可以看出此处指“要是没有……”。
50.A.certainly
B.impossible
C.hardly
D.probably
答案:D
解析:没有外祖母和邻居的帮助,詹姆斯也许很小的时候就死了。故选D项。
51.A.goal
B.game
C.match
D.chance
答案:D
解析:goal“目标”;game“比赛,游戏”;match“比赛”;chance“机会”。take
any
chance表示“利用任何机会”。
52.A.hate
B.refuse
C.object
D.reject
答案:A
解析:下文的don’t
like暗示该空应填hate。
53.A.looked
B.seized
C.went
D.held
答案:B
解析:seize
the
opportunity“抓住机会”,与语境相符。
54.A.afraid
B.unlucky
C.able
D.certain
答案:C
解析:be
afraid
to
do
sth“害怕做某事”;be
unlucky
to
do
sth“做某事很不幸”;be
able
to
do
sth“能够做某事”;be
certain
to
do
sth“一定做某事”。由句子含义可知,此处able为最佳答案。
55.A.keep
B.forbid
C.protect
D.stop
答案:D
解析:stop
sb
(from)
doing
sth,“阻止某人做某事”,符合句意。若将stop
改为keep,则from不可省,故选D项。
56.A.according
B.referring
C.thanks
D.sticking
答案:C
解析:according
to“根据,按照”;refer
to“参考,提到”;thanks
to“多亏”;stick
to“坚持”。由句意知,此处thanks为最佳答案。
57.A.fast
B.quick
C.high
D.top
答案:B
解析:强调“聪明的、反应快的”应用quick,而不用fast。
58.A.studying
B.resting
C.sleeping
D.eating
答案:A
解析:下文的college暗示该空应填studying。
59.A.advance
B.march
C.increase
D.develop
答案:D
解析:上大学的目的是发展能力,因此该空应填develop。
60.A.apart
from
B.but
C.except
D.without
答案:D
解析:詹姆斯成了没有文凭而成名的幸运者。
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
It
is
difficult
for
most
parents
to
teach
their
children
to
be
61.　　　　　　　　　(responsibility)
for
housework,but
with
one
of
the
following
suggestions,you
really
can
get
your
children
62.　　　　　　　　　(help)
at
home.?
If
you
give
your
children
the
impression
that
they
cannot
do
anything
quite
right,then
they
63.　　　　　　　　　(regard)
themselves
as
unfit
or
unable
persons.64.　　　　　　　
the
children
believe
that
they
can
succeed,they
will
never
become
65.　　　　　　　　(total)
independent.?
My
daughter
Carla’s
fifth-grade
teacher
made
every
child
in
her
class
special.When
students
received
66.　　　　　(little)
than
a
perfect
test
score,she
would
point
out
67.
they
had
mastered
and
declare
firmly
they
could
learn
what
they
had
missed.?
You
can
use
the
same
technique
when
you
evaluate
68.(you)
child’s
work
at
home.Don’t
always
scold
but
give
lots
of
praise
instead.Talk
about
what
he
has
done
right,not
about
what
he
hasn’t.If
a
difficult
task
has
been
done
right
by
your
child,promise
him
69.　　　　　　　　
Sunday
trip
or
a
ball
game
with
Dad.?
Learning
is
a
process
of
trying,failing,trying
and
succeeding.If
you
teach
your
children
not
to
fear
a
mistake
or
failure,they
will
learn
faster
and
achieve
70.(successful)
at
last.
答案:61.responsible　62.to
help　63.will
regard　64.Unless　65.totally　66.less　67.what　68.your　69.a
70.success
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
After
school
I
went
to
home
for
supper.When
I
got
home,I
found
my
mother
laying
in
bed.She
was
ill.Unluckily,my
father
was
away
from
home
in
business.“What
shall
I
do?”
I
thought
to
me.Since
Mother
was
ill,I
must
take
well
care
of
her.So
I
decided
to
try
cooking
by
myself.I
did
the
cooking
with
great
difficulty
but
it
got
burnt
at
last.I
had
thought
Mother
would
never
like.To
my
joy,Mother
praised
me
for
the
meat
I
have
cooked.She
said,“It
tastes
delicious.I’m
very
pleasing
with
it.”
I
knew
Mother
was
encouraging
us
to
do
more
by
myself.
答案:第一句:去掉to
第二句:laying→lying
第四句:in→on
第五句:me→myself
第六句:well→good
第八句:but→and
第九句:在like后加it
第十句:have→had或去掉have
第十一句:pleasing→pleased
第十二句:us→me
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
莫言,中国著名作家,原名管谟业,曾多次获得各种奖项。2012年10月获得了诺贝尔文学奖(The
Nobel
Prize
in
Literature)。请根据下列提示用英语写一篇关于他的约100词的简介。可适当增加细节,以使行文连贯。
1955年2月
出生于山东潍坊
2011年
作品《蛙(The
Frog)》获得茅盾文学奖(The
Mao
Dun
Prize
in
Literature)
2012年10月
获得诺贝尔文学奖,作为一名喜欢写作的人,为他感到骄傲
Mo
Yan
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
参考范文:
Mo
Yan?
Mo
Yan
was
born
in
February
1955
in
Weifang,Shandong
Province.What
you
may
not
know
is
that
his
real
name
is
Guan
Moye.Mo
Yan
is
his
pen
name,which
means
“no
speaking”.
In
my
opinion,Mo
Yan,who
began
writing
in
1981,is
one
of
the
most
famous
writers
in
China.And
he
won
many
kinds
of
prizes.For
example,in
2011
his
novel
The
Frog
won
the
Mao
Dun
Prize
in
Literature.Much
to
our
delight,he
won
the
Nobel
Prize
in
Literature
in
October
2012,which
is
an
honor
to
our
Chinese
people.
As
a
person
who
likes
writing
stories,I’m
proud
of
him
and
wish
to
be
as
great
a
writer
as
him
in
the
future.第二单元测评
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
M:OK,Gabrielle,you
have
been
a
teacher
for
quite
a
while.
W:Yes.You
know,I
worked
as
a
secretary
for
only
two
months
after
I
graduated.Maybe
teaching
is
what
I
really
like.
1.What
was
the
woman’s
first
job?
A.A
teacher.　　B.A
secretary.　　C.A
doctor.
M:When
will
the
show
begin?
W:It
began
10
minutes
ago.
M:What
time
is
it
now?
W:It’s
9:40.
2.When
did
the
show
begin?
A.At
9:50.
B.At
9:40.
C.At
9:30.
W:Well,I
must
go
home
now.It’s
great
seeing
you
again.
M:Oh,it’s
nice
seeing
you
too.
3.What
are
the
two
speakers
doing?
A.Enjoying
meeting
their
friend.
B.Saying
goodbye
to
each
other.
C.Planning
to
see
each
other
again.
M:What
can
I
do
for
you,madam?
W:I’m
looking
for
a
new
dress
for
my
daughter
as
a
Christmas
present.
4.Where
does
the
dialogue
take
place?
A.In
an
office.
B.In
a
clothing
shop.
C.In
the
man’s
house.
M:I’m
feeling
kind
of
sick
tonight.I
don’t
know
if
I
have
a
virus,or
if
it’s
something
I
ate
for
lunch.Maybe
we
should
stay
at
home
tonight.
W:I
think
you’re
right.I
feel
a
little
under
the
weather
myself.
5.What
will
the
woman
do
tonight?
A.She
will
stay
at
home
with
the
man.
B.She
will
send
for
a
doctor
by
herself.
C.She
will
watch
the
weather
forecast.
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6、7题。
M:Hi,May.Do
you
live
far
from
the
school?
W:Yes,very
far.It
takes
me
one
hour
by
bus.
M:Why
don’t
you
ride
a
bike?
W:There
is
a
lot
of
traffic.
M:That’s
not
a
problem,if
you
are
careful
enough.I
go
to
school
by
bike
every
day.
W:I’ll
try.
6.How
does
the
boy
go
to
school
every
day?
A.By
bus.
B.By
bike.
C.On
foot.
7.Why
doesn’t
the
girl
go
to
school
by
bike?
A.Because
she
hates
the
heavy
traffic.
B.Because
she
doesn’t
have
a
bike
herself.
C.Because
she
doesn’t
like
to
ride
a
bike.
听第7段材料,回答第8、9题。
W:Was
there
an
accident
on
the
freeway
today?
M:You
haven’t
heard
about
it?
W:No,do
you
know
what
happened?
M:A
car
knocked
into
a
truck,but
strangely
enough
the
truck
turned
over.
W:Are
you
serious?
M:I’m
telling
you
the
truth.
W:Did
anyone
get
hurt?
M:Two
people
were
injured.
W:Well,it’s
unbelievable
that
no
one
was
killed.
M:Yes,they
were
lucky.
8.Where
did
the
accident
happen?
A.On
a
highway.
B.On
a
freeway.
C.On
a
road.
9.What
was
strange
about
the
accident?
A.Two
people
got
hurt.
B.The
truck
turned
over.
C.One
person
was
killed.
听第8段材料,回答第10至12题。
M:Hello,Susan.How
is
everything
in
New
York?
W:Never
better,Henry.How
are
you?How
is
the
family?
M:Everyone
is
fine,but
actually
I
am
feeling
a
little
tired
these
days.
W:You
are
getting
older,Henry.And
you
are
heavier
than
you
used
to
be.
M:Everyone
gets
older,but
you
look
younger
than
ever.What’s
your
secret?
W:There
is
no
secret.I
get
more
exercise
than
you,and
I
am
more
careful
about
my
diet.You
should
be,too.
M:You
are
right.When
the
weather
is
warmer,I’ll
do
it.
W:No,Henry.You
should
start
now.
M:OK,I’ll
start
today.Thank
you
for
the
advice.
10.What
does
Susan
think
of
her
life
in
New
York?
A.She
doesn’t
like
it
at
all.
B.She
thinks
highly
of
it.
C.She
feels
it
just
so-so.
11.What
can
we
learn
about
Henry
from
the
dialogue?
A.He
is
heavier
than
before.
B.He
looks
younger
than
ever.
C.He
decides
to
keep
on
a
diet.
12.Why
does
Susan
look
younger?
A.Because
she
is
full
of
energy.
B.Because
she
stays
in
warm
weather.
C.Because
she
lives
a
healthier
life.
听第9段材料,回答第13至16题。
W:So,what
are
you
going
to
do
this
summer?
M:Well,I’m
probably
going
on
holiday
with
my
parents
for
a
week,but
I
really
hope
I
can
get
a
summer
job
in
a
market.What
about
you?
W:I’m
going
to
Scotland
for
the
summer.
M:For
the
whole
summer?
W:Yes,well,I’m
going
for
seven
weeks.I’m
going
to
work
in
a
hotel
in
the
mountains.
M:Really?That
sounds
great!
W:Yes,I
think
so.I
mean,the
work
won’t
be
very
interesting.It’ll
be
mostly
cooking,cleaning
and
working
on
reception,selling
drinks
and
things.But
my
hours
are
seven
till
ten
in
the
morning
and
five
till
nine
in
the
evening,so
I’ll
have
plenty
of
time
during
the
day
to
go
walking.
M:I
wish
I
could
get
a
job
like
that.How
did
you
find
it?
W:I
read
about
it
in
a
book
called
Summer
Work
Round
Britain.It
tells
you
about
all
kinds
of
different
jobs
in
different
places.You
can
work
at
farms
picking
fruit,or
at
hotels
near
the
sea.You
can
even
get
work
at
music
festivals.
13.Where
will
the
woman
plan
to
work
in
summer?
A.In
a
hotel.
B.In
a
market.
C.On
a
farm.
14.How
long
will
the
woman
work
in
the
morning?
A.One
hour.
B.Three
hours.
C.Four
hours.
15.What
will
the
woman
prefer
to
do
in
her
free
time?
A.Go
walking.
B.Pick
fruit.
C.Sell
drinks.
16.What
are
the
two
speakers
talking
about
in
general?
A.Study.
B.Music
festivals.
C.Summer
plans.
听第10段材料,回答第17至20题。
M:We
are
lucky
to
have
in
the
studio
today,Molly
Taylor.Molly
is
arranging
an
activity
course
for
the
summer
holidays.Molly,this
is
the
second
year
of
the
course,isn’t
it?
W:Yes,that’s
right.The
summer
course
operated
last
year
for
a
six-week
period.We
did
think
about
making
it
longer
this
year
and
have
a
seven-week
course,as
some
schools
finish
their
term
a
week
earlier.But
in
the
end
we
decided
to
keep
to
the
same
plan
as
last
year.And
we
were
actually
very
surprised
last
year
by
the
number
of
people
interested
in
the
course.We
didn’t
actually
have
enough
workers
to
look
after
all
the
children
who
wanted
to
attend
and
we
had
to
turn
people
away.There
was
such
a
lot
of
rain
that
we
had
to
organize
art
and
music
activities
indoors.This
year
we
also
considered
providing
some
more
exciting
adventure
sports
like
rock
climbing
and
caving.We
decided
not
to,in
the
end,because
it
would
make
the
course
a
lot
more
expensive
for
parents.Instead,we’re
introducing
some
fun
projects.For
example,we’re
going
to
put
on
a
talent
show
and
organize
an
American
Night.I
think
it
will
be
good
for
the
kids,and
teach
them
good
skills
too.As
parents,you
should
go
to
my
website,
and
print
out
an
application
form.Send
it
to
my
office
address
as
soon
as
possible,because
the
places
are
going
fast.We
do
need
to
know
if
the
child
has
any
special
needs
regarding
their
diet.
17.How
long
will
the
course
run
this
year?
A.Six
weeks.
B.Seven
weeks.
C.Eight
weeks.
18.What
was
the
problem
last
year?
A.Few
people
wanted
to
attend.
B.There
were
too
few
workers.
C.Nothing
to
do
on
rainy
days.
19.What
will
the
children
do
this
year?
A.They
will
join
in
rock
climbing.
B.They
will
do
new
outdoor
sports.
C.They
will
attend
a
talent
show.
20.What’s
important
for
parents
whose
children
attend
the
course?
A.Attending
the
American
Night
with
the
children.
B.Sending
money
to
Molly
as
soon
as
possible.
C.Informing
Molly
about
any
food
the
child
cannot
eat.
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
You
may
think
there
are
no
differences
between
British
and
American
people.After
all,they
speak
the
same
language,don’t
they?If
you
ask
a
British
or
an
American
person,he
will
probably
tell
you
that
there
are
differences.And
the
differences
are
quite
great.
What
do
British
people
think
American
people
are
like?The
British
think
American
people
are
very
strange.They
make
a
lot
of
noise
and
they
laugh
too
loudly.They
are
rich,and
they
only
think
about
money.But
the
British
do
say
that
American
people
are
kind,and
friendly
people.They’re
happy
to
help
you
if
you
are
in
trouble.
What
do
Americans
think
of
the
British?Well,they
think
the
British
are
cold
and
very
unfriendly.They
are
not
interested
in
success
or
in
making
lots
of
money.They
think
British
is
the
best
country
in
the
world.They
look
down
on
other
countries.But
Americans
say
that
the
British
are
quite
hard
workers.They
are
brave
and
honest.And
in
time
of
trouble
they
face
difficulties
happily.
You
can
see
that
these
ideas
can
cause
misunderstanding
between
the
British
and
Americans.But
when
American
and
British
people
become
friends,they
usually
find
things
are
not
as
bad
as
they
expected.
21.Are
there
any
differences
between
British
and
American
people?
A.Yes,the
differences
are
very
small.
B.Yes,the
differences
are
quite
great.
C.No,there
isn’t
any
difference
between
them.
D.Some
people
think
there
are,but
some
people
don’t
think
so.
22.What
do
British
people
think
Americans
are
like?
A.They
are
selfish.　　　　B.They
are
poor.
C.They
are
strange
people.
D.They
are
unfriendly.
23.What
do
the
Americans
think
of
the
British?
A.They
are
cold
and
unfriendly.
B.They
are
kind.
C.They
are
lazy.
D.They
are
rich.
24.The
American
and
British
people
usually
get
along
quite
well
　　　.?
A.when
they
become
friends
B.when
they
become
enemies
C.after
they
fight
D.after
they
quarrel
B
The
English
language
started
about
1500
years
ago
in
England.Three
groups
of
people
came
to
the
country.They
were
the
Angles,the
Saxons,and
the
Jutes.These
three
groups
brought
their
languages
with
them
to
England.After
some
time,the
three
languages
became
one
new
language—English.The
name
“English”
comes
from
the
Angles.They
lived
in
most
of
England.“England”
means
“Angle
Land”
or
“Country
of
the
Angles”.
The
language
that
we
speak
today—Modern
English—is
not
the
same
as
the
English
that
people
used
1500
years
ago,including
Old
English
(before
1150)
and
Middle
English
(up
till
1500).That
language—Old
English—sounds
different,and
it
has
some
different
rules
of
grammar.There
were
only
a
few
thousand
words
in
Old
English.But
Modern
English
does
come
from
Old
English,and
it
is
still
like
it
in
many
important
ways.
25.When
did
Modern
English
start?
A.About
the
year
1150.
B.Before
the
year
1500.
C.Between
the
12th
century
and
the
16th
century.
D.About
1500
years
ago.
26.How
many
languages
did
Old
English
come
from?
A.One.　　　　　　　　B.Two.
C.Three.
D.Four.
27.Which
language
did
the
name
“English”
come
from?
A.Modern
English.
B.The
Angles.
C.The
Jutes.
D.The
Saxons.
28.What
can
be
learned
from
the
passage?
A.Modern
English
has
nothing
to
do
with
Old
English.
B.Modern
English
has
more
words
than
Old
English.
C.Modern
English
has
a
vocabulary(词汇量)
twice
as
large
as
old
English.
D.There
is
no
difference
between
Old
English
and
Middle
English.
C
A
student
is
learning
to
speak
British
English.He
wonders
(想知道):Can
I
communicate
with
Americans?Can
they
understand
me?Learners
of
English
often
ask:What
are
the
differences
between
British
and
American
English?How
important
are
these
differences?
Certainly!there
are
some
differences
between
British
and
American
English.There
are
a
few
differences
in
grammar.For
example,speakers
of
British
English
say
“in
hospital”
and
“Have
you
a
pen?”
Americans
say
“in
the
hospital!”
and
“Do
you
have
a
pen?”.Pronunciation
is
sometimes
different.Americans
usually
sound
theirs
in
words
like
“bird”
and
“hurt”.Speakers
of
British
English
do
not
sound
theirs
in
these
words.There
are
differences
between
British
and
American
English
in
spelling
and
vocabulary.For
example,“colour”
and
“honour”
are
British,“color”
and
honor”
are
American.
These
differences
in
grammar,pronunciation,spelling
and
vocabulary
are
not
important,however.For
the
most
part,British
and
American
English
are
the
same
language.
29.According
to
this
passage,a
student
who
is
learning
to
speak
British
English
might
be
afraid
that
　　　.?
A.American
people
cannot
understand
him
B.American
people
cannot
understand
him
C.the
grammar
is
too
hard
for
him
D.the
spelling
is
too
hard
for
him
30.What
are
American
English
and
British
English
different
in?
A.Spelling.
B.Pronunciation.
C.Grammar.
D.All
of
the
above.
31.What
is
NOT
mentioned
(提及)
in
the
passage?
A.Whether
there
are
differences
between
British
English
and
American
English.
B.Whether
British
English
and
American
English
are
one
language
or
two.
C.How
the
differences
between
British
English
and
American
English
came
about.
D.How
important
the
differences
are.
32.Who
say
“Do
you
have
a
watch?”
A.British
people.
B.American
people.
C.Children.
D.Teachers.
D
Standard
English
is
the
formal
English
that
you
need
to
use
when
you
write
in
coursework
or
in
the
exam.Standard
English
is
the
form
of
English
you
learn
in
school.All
written
English
should
be
standard
means
that
it
should
be
clear
enough
for
anyone
in
Britain
to
understand
it.Standard
English
developed
as
the
main
form
of
printed
English
in
the
15th
century.At
the
time,every
region
of
Britain
used
to
spell
words
differently,but
printers
needed
a
fixed
spelling.Printers
like
Caxton
chose
the
East
Midlands
dialect
form
which
was
used
in
London
and
the
South
East.Soon
standard
English
replaced
all
written
dialect
forms—the
other
forms
of
English
spoken
around
the
country.It
also
replaced
French
and
Latin
in
law
and
in
academic
(学术的)
works.In
the
18th
century,people
wrote
dictionaries
and
grammar
books
which
standardized
spelling.Dr
Johnson’s
Dictionary
of
1755
fixed
many
of
the
spellings
we
still
use
today.All
written
English
should
be
standard
English—any
grammar
rules
you
learn
are
for
standard
English
and
you
will
definitely
need
to
learn
them
to
avoid
making
mistakes
in
your
work.The
rules
of
standard
English
mean
using
the
correct
forms
of
words
with
the
correct
spellings.
Avoid
slang
words
(俚语)—words
that
your
teachers
or
friends
wouldn’t
understand.You’ll
lose
marks
if
the
examiners
can’t
understand
what
you
say
or
write.Don’t
use
dialect
words.Every
region
has
words
or
phrases
that
are
only
used
there.Don’t
use
them
in
your
coursework,because
you
won’t
be
understood.Make
sure
you
revise
grammar
and
punctuation
(标点)
you
have
learned,and
learn
the
list
of
commonly
misspelled
words
you
have
made.Clichés
are
ideas
or
sayings
which
have
been
used
so
often
that
they’ve
become
boring
and
unoriginal.Phrases
like,“As
good
as
it
gets”
“At
the
end
of
the
day”
“In
the
fullness
of
time”
are
all
clichés.
So
are
images
like,“as
fierce
as
a
lion”
“as
cunning
as
a
fox”.If
you
use
them
you
will
sound
boring
and
unimaginative—that
could
mean
you
lose
marks
for
writing
and
speaking
style.So
avoid
clichés.
33.What
is
standard
English?
A.The
English
spoken
by
British
people.
B.The
English
spoken
by
American
people.
C.The
English
spoken
by
British
people
in
the
15th
Century.
D.The
English
used
in
London.
34.What
are
clichés
according
to
the
passage?
A.The
English
full
of
slang
words.
B.The
long
phrases
which
are
used
often.
C.The
boring
ideas
or
sayings
because
of
being
used
often.
D.All
the
English
which
is
used
outside
of
London
and
in
the
southeast
of
Britain.
35.Why
do
we
need
to
use
standard
English?
A.Because
no
one
can
understand
dialect
words.
B.Because
local
dialect
belongs
to
a
certain
region,not
everyone
can
understand
it.
C.Because
there
are
many
kinds
of
English
in
the
world,we
need
standard
English
to
make
communication
easier.
D.Because
standard
English
has
been
used
for
a
long
time.
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
Oral
English,also
known
as
spoken
English,is
the
form
of
English
that
is
used
when
people
are
speaking
to
one
another.Students
who
are
learning
English
as
a
second
language
often
feel
uncomfortable
using
oral
English
because
they
fear
that
they
will
not
be
understood.It
is
important
that
a
person
who
is
learning
to
speak
English
practices
using
the
language.　36　?
Listening
is
important
to
learning
spoken
English.　37　
Pay
attention
to
conversations
that
happen
around
you
while
you
are
shopping.Watch
the
news
every
evening
while
you
have
supper.?
Part
of
learning
spoken
English
is
in
understanding
how
English
words
are
formed.Watch
the
mouths
and
tongues
of
native
English
speakers
carefully.　38　Notice
how
the
lips
form
certain
sounds.Imitate
(模仿)
what
you
see.?
Rent
movies
over
the
weekend.Try
to
follow
the
story
line
of
comedy
shows.　39　
Not
having
to
respond
in
English
lets
you
concentrate
on
simply
understanding
what
is
being
said.Understanding
how
English
is
used
in
conversation
will
help
you
to
better
communicate
in
the
language.?
　40　
When
you
are
reading,pay
more
attention
to
the
correct
pronunciation
of
the
words
you
are
reading
rather
than
comprehension
of
each
word.Read
easy
books
that
are
written
for
children.Reading
simple
books
takes
away
the
frustration
of
sounding
out
hard
words.?
A.Read
out
loud
for
twenty
to
thirty
minutes
every
day.
B.Listen
to
English
radio
while
getting
ready
in
the
morning.
C.Observe
how
much
the
mouth
is
opened
to
say
certain
words.
D.Find
a
friend
or
teacher
who
is
willing
to
help
you
learn
English.
E.Repeat
the
conversations
several
times
to
increase
your
speaking
speed.
F.Watching
TV
shows
and
movies
allows
you
to
hear
English
used
in
conversation.
G.The
more
a
person
practices
his
or
her
skills,the
more
easily
speaking
English
will
become.
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
People
from
Great
Britain
brought
the
English
language
to
North
America
in
the
16th
and
17th
centuries.And
in
the
　41　
300
years,there
were
　42　
many
changes
in
　43　
places
that
now
people
can　44　
tell
an
English
person
　45　
an
American
in
the
way
he
or
she
talks.?
Many
old
words
　46　
in
England
but
were
kept
in
America.For
example,300
years
ago
people
in
Great
Britain
got
their
water
from
something
they
called
either
a
“faucet”,a
“spigot”,or
a
“tap”.All
these
words
are
　47　
heard
in
different
parts
of
America,but
only
“tap”
is
still
common
in
　48　.Americans
often
made
up
new
words
or
changed
old
　49　.“Corn”
is
one
kind
of
plant
in
America
and
　50　
in
England.?
Also,over
the
last
three
centuries
the
English
language
has
　51　
thousands
of
new
words
for
things
that
weren’t
known
　52　.And
often,American
and
English
people
used
two
　53　
names
for
them.A
tin
can
is
called
“tin”
for
short
in
England,but
a
“can”
in
America.The
word
“radio”
is
　54　
all
over
the
world,including
America.But
many
English
people
call
it
“wireless”.And
almost
anything
having
something
to
do
　55　
cars,railroads,etc.　56　
different
names
in
British
and
American
English.?
But
now
American
and
British
English
may
be
growing
close
together.One
　57　
is
the
large
amount
of
American
speeches
that
British
people
hear
daily
in
movies,on
television,or
　58　
travelers.　59　
this,Americans
seem
to
be
influencing
the
British
more
or
less.So
some
day,English
may
even
be
　60　
on
both
sides
of
the
Atlantic.?
41.A.following　　B.recent　　C.oldest　　D.last
42.A.such
B.too
C.so
D.great
43.A.either
B.both
C.neither
D.two
44.A.hardly
B.difficultly
C.clearly
D.easily
45.A.with
B.from
C.to
D.and
46.A.disappeared
B.happened
C.spoke
D.took
47.A.not
B.hardly
C.also
D.still
48.A.America
B.the
two
countries
C.England
D.British
49.A.word
B.forms
C.ones
D.ways
50.A.another
B.other
C.others
D.one
51.A.watched
B.added
C.discovered
D.answered
52.A.anywhere
B.in
some
countries
C.before
D.for
centuries
53.A.new
B.short
C.different
D.surprising
54.A.produced
B.made
C.developed
D.used
55.A.to
B.away
C.with
D.from
56.A.has
B.have
C.have
given
D.was
given
57.A.thing
B.cause
C.belief
D.expression
58.A.from
B.in
C.on
D.to
59.A.As
B.Because
C.Besides
D.Because
of
60.A.different
B.more
different
C.the
same
D.more
useful
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
English
is
61.　　　　　
language
spoken
all
around
the
world.There
62.　　　　　(be)
more
than
42
countries
where
most
people
speak
English.Most
native
speakers
of
English
are
found
63.　　　　　
the
United
States,the
United
Kingdom,Canada,Australia,South
Africa,Ireland
and
New
Zealand.For
more
than
375
million
people,English
is
64.　　　　　(them)
mother
tongue.An
equal
(同等的)
number
of
people
learn
English
as
a
65.　　　　　　(two)
language.These
people
speak
the
language
of
their
own
country
at
home
with
their
family,66.　　　　　
the
language
that
the
government
(政府)
67.　　　　　(use)
is
English.The
number
68.　　　　　
people
who
learn
English
as
a
foreign
language
is
69.　　　　　(many)
than
750
million.Everywhere
in
the
world,70.　　　　　　　(child)
go
to
school
to
learn
English.?
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
I
want
to
know
which
is
best
way
to
learn
a
language.I
think
we
should
remember
what
we
all
learned
our
own
language
when
we
were
child
at
school.If
we
learn
a
second
language
by
the
same
way,it
will
not
be
such
difficult
as
we
expect.Think
of
what
small
child
does
every
day.He
listens
to
people
close
to
he
speak
and
tries
to
learn
something.He
is
using
the
language.He
was
talking
with
them
in
it
but
thinking
in
it
all
the
time.So
if
you
want
to
learn
a
language
good,just
work
hard
at
it.
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
请你以学生会的名义为一场英语演讲比赛写一则海报。
比赛时间
9月19日下午3:00~5:00
比赛地点
学校活动中心
报名方式
参加比赛的同学将姓名和演讲话题报给班长
报名截止日期
9月15日
Poster
?
?
?
?
?
?
May
you
succeed!
The
Students’
Union
September
10th
第二单元测评
答案
(时间:120分钟　满分:150分)
第Ⅰ卷
第一部分　听力(共两节,满分30分)
第一节(共5小题;每小题1.5分,满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后,你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
M:OK,Gabrielle,you
have
been
a
teacher
for
quite
a
while.
W:Yes.You
know,I
worked
as
a
secretary
for
only
two
months
after
I
graduated.Maybe
teaching
is
what
I
really
like.
1.What
was
the
woman’s
first
job?
A.A
teacher.　　B.A
secretary.　　C.A
doctor.
答案:B
M:When
will
the
show
begin?
W:It
began
10
minutes
ago.
M:What
time
is
it
now?
W:It’s
9:40.
2.When
did
the
show
begin?
A.At
9:50.
B.At
9:40.
C.At
9:30.
答案:C
W:Well,I
must
go
home
now.It’s
great
seeing
you
again.
M:Oh,it’s
nice
seeing
you
too.
3.What
are
the
two
speakers
doing?
A.Enjoying
meeting
their
friend.
B.Saying
goodbye
to
each
other.
C.Planning
to
see
each
other
again.
答案:B
M:What
can
I
do
for
you,madam?
W:I’m
looking
for
a
new
dress
for
my
daughter
as
a
Christmas
present.
4.Where
does
the
dialogue
take
place?
A.In
an
office.
B.In
a
clothing
shop.
C.In
the
man’s
house.
答案:B
M:I’m
feeling
kind
of
sick
tonight.I
don’t
know
if
I
have
a
virus,or
if
it’s
something
I
ate
for
lunch.Maybe
we
should
stay
at
home
tonight.
W:I
think
you’re
right.I
feel
a
little
under
the
weather
myself.
5.What
will
the
woman
do
tonight?
A.She
will
stay
at
home
with
the
man.
B.She
will
send
for
a
doctor
by
herself.
C.She
will
watch
the
weather
forecast.
答案:A
第二节(共15小题;每小题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题,从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项,并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前,你将有时间阅读各个小题,每小题5秒钟;听完后,各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料,回答第6、7题。
M:Hi,May.Do
you
live
far
from
the
school?
W:Yes,very
far.It
takes
me
one
hour
by
bus.
M:Why
don’t
you
ride
a
bike?
W:There
is
a
lot
of
traffic.
M:That’s
not
a
problem,if
you
are
careful
enough.I
go
to
school
by
bike
every
day.
W:I’ll
try.
6.How
does
the
boy
go
to
school
every
day?
A.By
bus.
B.By
bike.
C.On
foot.
答案:B
7.Why
doesn’t
the
girl
go
to
school
by
bike?
A.Because
she
hates
the
heavy
traffic.
B.Because
she
doesn’t
have
a
bike
herself.
C.Because
she
doesn’t
like
to
ride
a
bike.
答案:A
听第7段材料,回答第8、9题。
W:Was
there
an
accident
on
the
freeway
today?
M:You
haven’t
heard
about
it?
W:No,do
you
know
what
happened?
M:A
car
knocked
into
a
truck,but
strangely
enough
the
truck
turned
over.
W:Are
you
serious?
M:I’m
telling
you
the
truth.
W:Did
anyone
get
hurt?
M:Two
people
were
injured.
W:Well,it’s
unbelievable
that
no
one
was
killed.
M:Yes,they
were
lucky.
8.Where
did
the
accident
happen?
A.On
a
highway.
B.On
a
freeway.
C.On
a
road.
答案:B
9.What
was
strange
about
the
accident?
A.Two
people
got
hurt.
B.The
truck
turned
over.
C.One
person
was
killed.
答案:B
听第8段材料,回答第10至12题。
M:Hello,Susan.How
is
everything
in
New
York?
W:Never
better,Henry.How
are
you?How
is
the
family?
M:Everyone
is
fine,but
actually
I
am
feeling
a
little
tired
these
days.
W:You
are
getting
older,Henry.And
you
are
heavier
than
you
used
to
be.
M:Everyone
gets
older,but
you
look
younger
than
ever.What’s
your
secret?
W:There
is
no
secret.I
get
more
exercise
than
you,and
I
am
more
careful
about
my
diet.You
should
be,too.
M:You
are
right.When
the
weather
is
warmer,I’ll
do
it.
W:No,Henry.You
should
start
now.
M:OK,I’ll
start
today.Thank
you
for
the
advice.
10.What
does
Susan
think
of
her
life
in
New
York?
A.She
doesn’t
like
it
at
all.
B.She
thinks
highly
of
it.
C.She
feels
it
just
so-so.
答案:B
11.What
can
we
learn
about
Henry
from
the
dialogue?
A.He
is
heavier
than
before.
B.He
looks
younger
than
ever.
C.He
decides
to
keep
on
a
diet.
答案:A
12.Why
does
Susan
look
younger?
A.Because
she
is
full
of
energy.
B.Because
she
stays
in
warm
weather.
C.Because
she
lives
a
healthier
life.
答案:C
听第9段材料,回答第13至16题。
W:So,what
are
you
going
to
do
this
summer?
M:Well,I’m
probably
going
on
holiday
with
my
parents
for
a
week,but
I
really
hope
I
can
get
a
summer
job
in
a
market.What
about
you?
W:I’m
going
to
Scotland
for
the
summer.
M:For
the
whole
summer?
W:Yes,well,I’m
going
for
seven
weeks.I’m
going
to
work
in
a
hotel
in
the
mountains.
M:Really?That
sounds
great!
W:Yes,I
think
so.I
mean,the
work
won’t
be
very
interesting.It’ll
be
mostly
cooking,cleaning
and
working
on
reception,selling
drinks
and
things.But
my
hours
are
seven
till
ten
in
the
morning
and
five
till
nine
in
the
evening,so
I’ll
have
plenty
of
time
during
the
day
to
go
walking.
M:I
wish
I
could
get
a
job
like
that.How
did
you
find
it?
W:I
read
about
it
in
a
book
called
Summer
Work
Round
Britain.It
tells
you
about
all
kinds
of
different
jobs
in
different
places.You
can
work
at
farms
picking
fruit,or
at
hotels
near
the
sea.You
can
even
get
work
at
music
festivals.
13.Where
will
the
woman
plan
to
work
in
summer?
A.In
a
hotel.
B.In
a
market.
C.On
a
farm.
答案:A
14.How
long
will
the
woman
work
in
the
morning?
A.One
hour.
B.Three
hours.
C.Four
hours.
答案:B
15.What
will
the
woman
prefer
to
do
in
her
free
time?
A.Go
walking.
B.Pick
fruit.
C.Sell
drinks.
答案:A
16.What
are
the
two
speakers
talking
about
in
general?
A.Study.
B.Music
festivals.
C.Summer
plans.
答案:C
听第10段材料,回答第17至20题。
M:We
are
lucky
to
have
in
the
studio
today,Molly
Taylor.Molly
is
arranging
an
activity
course
for
the
summer
holidays.Molly,this
is
the
second
year
of
the
course,isn’t
it?
W:Yes,that’s
right.The
summer
course
operated
last
year
for
a
six-week
period.We
did
think
about
making
it
longer
this
year
and
have
a
seven-week
course,as
some
schools
finish
their
term
a
week
earlier.But
in
the
end
we
decided
to
keep
to
the
same
plan
as
last
year.And
we
were
actually
very
surprised
last
year
by
the
number
of
people
interested
in
the
course.We
didn’t
actually
have
enough
workers
to
look
after
all
the
children
who
wanted
to
attend
and
we
had
to
turn
people
away.There
was
such
a
lot
of
rain
that
we
had
to
organize
art
and
music
activities
indoors.This
year
we
also
considered
providing
some
more
exciting
adventure
sports
like
rock
climbing
and
caving.We
decided
not
to,in
the
end,because
it
would
make
the
course
a
lot
more
expensive
for
parents.Instead,we’re
introducing
some
fun
projects.For
example,we’re
going
to
put
on
a
talent
show
and
organize
an
American
Night.I
think
it
will
be
good
for
the
kids,and
teach
them
good
skills
too.As
parents,you
should
go
to
my
website,
and
print
out
an
application
form.Send
it
to
my
office
address
as
soon
as
possible,because
the
places
are
going
fast.We
do
need
to
know
if
the
child
has
any
special
needs
regarding
their
diet.
17.How
long
will
the
course
run
this
year?
A.Six
weeks.
B.Seven
weeks.
C.Eight
weeks.
答案:A
18.What
was
the
problem
last
year?
A.Few
people
wanted
to
attend.
B.There
were
too
few
workers.
C.Nothing
to
do
on
rainy
days.
答案:B
19.What
will
the
children
do
this
year?
A.They
will
join
in
rock
climbing.
B.They
will
do
new
outdoor
sports.
C.They
will
attend
a
talent
show.
答案:C
20.What’s
important
for
parents
whose
children
attend
the
course?
A.Attending
the
American
Night
with
the
children.
B.Sending
money
to
Molly
as
soon
as
possible.
C.Informing
Molly
about
any
food
the
child
cannot
eat.
答案:C
第二部分　阅读理解(共两节,满分40分)
第一节(共15小题;每小题2分,满分30分)
阅读下列短文,从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出最佳选项。
A
You
may
think
there
are
no
differences
between
British
and
American
people.After
all,they
speak
the
same
language,don’t
they?If
you
ask
a
British
or
an
American
person,he
will
probably
tell
you
that
there
are
differences.And
the
differences
are
quite
great.
What
do
British
people
think
American
people
are
like?The
British
think
American
people
are
very
strange.They
make
a
lot
of
noise
and
they
laugh
too
loudly.They
are
rich,and
they
only
think
about
money.But
the
British
do
say
that
American
people
are
kind,and
friendly
people.They’re
happy
to
help
you
if
you
are
in
trouble.
What
do
Americans
think
of
the
British?Well,they
think
the
British
are
cold
and
very
unfriendly.They
are
not
interested
in
success
or
in
making
lots
of
money.They
think
British
is
the
best
country
in
the
world.They
look
down
on
other
countries.But
Americans
say
that
the
British
are
quite
hard
workers.They
are
brave
and
honest.And
in
time
of
trouble
they
face
difficulties
happily.
You
can
see
that
these
ideas
can
cause
misunderstanding
between
the
British
and
Americans.But
when
American
and
British
people
become
friends,they
usually
find
things
are
not
as
bad
as
they
expected.
21.Are
there
any
differences
between
British
and
American
people?
A.Yes,the
differences
are
very
small.
B.Yes,the
differences
are
quite
great.
C.No,there
isn’t
any
difference
between
them.
D.Some
people
think
there
are,but
some
people
don’t
think
so.
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。第一段最后一句说明英国人和美国人之间差异很大。
22.What
do
British
people
think
Americans
are
like?
A.They
are
selfish.　　　　B.They
are
poor.
C.They
are
strange
people.
D.They
are
unfriendly.
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。由第二段的第二句可知答案。
23.What
do
the
Americans
think
of
the
British?
A.They
are
cold
and
unfriendly.
B.They
are
kind.
C.They
are
lazy.
D.They
are
rich.
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。第三段第二句中提到美国人认为英国人既冷漠又不友好。
24.The
American
and
British
people
usually
get
along
quite
well
　　　.?
A.when
they
become
friends
B.when
they
become
enemies
C.after
they
fight
D.after
they
quarrel
答案:A
解析:细节理解题。由文章最后一句“当英国人和美国人成为朋友时,他们会发现事情并不像他们预料得那样糟糕”,可知他们成为朋友后,会相处得较好。
B
The
English
language
started
about
1500
years
ago
in
England.Three
groups
of
people
came
to
the
country.They
were
the
Angles,the
Saxons,and
the
Jutes.These
three
groups
brought
their
languages
with
them
to
England.After
some
time,the
three
languages
became
one
new
language—English.The
name
“English”
comes
from
the
Angles.They
lived
in
most
of
England.“England”
means
“Angle
Land”
or
“Country
of
the
Angles”.
The
language
that
we
speak
today—Modern
English—is
not
the
same
as
the
English
that
people
used
1500
years
ago,including
Old
English
(before
1150)
and
Middle
English
(up
till
1500).That
language—Old
English—sounds
different,and
it
has
some
different
rules
of
grammar.There
were
only
a
few
thousand
words
in
Old
English.But
Modern
English
does
come
from
Old
English,and
it
is
still
like
it
in
many
important
ways.
25.When
did
Modern
English
start?
A.About
the
year
1150.
B.Before
the
year
1500.
C.Between
the
12th
century
and
the
16th
century.
D.About
1500
years
ago.
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。由第二段第一句“The
language
that
we
speak
today—Modern
English—is
not
the
same
as
the
English
that
people
used
1500
years
ago...”可知答案为D项。
26.How
many
languages
did
Old
English
come
from?
A.One.　　　　　　　　B.Two.
C.Three.
D.Four.
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。由第一段可知答案为C项。
27.Which
language
did
the
name
“English”
come
from?
A.Modern
English.
B.The
Angles.
C.The
Jutes.
D.The
Saxons.
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。由第一段倒数第三句“The
name
‘English’
comes
from
the
Angles.”可知答案为B项。
28.What
can
be
learned
from
the
passage?
A.Modern
English
has
nothing
to
do
with
Old
English.
B.Modern
English
has
more
words
than
Old
English.
C.Modern
English
has
a
vocabulary(词汇量)
twice
as
large
as
old
English.
D.There
is
no
difference
between
Old
English
and
Middle
English.
答案:B
解析:根据文意我们知道现代英语来源于古代英语,但现代英语比古代英语有更多的词汇,而且在发音、语法等方面二者也不完全一样。
C
A
student
is
learning
to
speak
British
English.He
wonders
(想知道):Can
I
communicate
with
Americans?Can
they
understand
me?Learners
of
English
often
ask:What
are
the
differences
between
British
and
American
English?How
important
are
these
differences?
Certainly!there
are
some
differences
between
British
and
American
English.There
are
a
few
differences
in
grammar.For
example,speakers
of
British
English
say
“in
hospital”
and
“Have
you
a
pen?”
Americans
say
“in
the
hospital!”
and
“Do
you
have
a
pen?”.Pronunciation
is
sometimes
different.Americans
usually
sound
theirs
in
words
like
“bird”
and
“hurt”.Speakers
of
British
English
do
not
sound
theirs
in
these
words.There
are
differences
between
British
and
American
English
in
spelling
and
vocabulary.For
example,“colour”
and
“honour”
are
British,“color”
and
honor”
are
American.
These
differences
in
grammar,pronunciation,spelling
and
vocabulary
are
not
important,however.For
the
most
part,British
and
American
English
are
the
same
language.
29.According
to
this
passage,a
student
who
is
learning
to
speak
British
English
might
be
afraid
that
　　　.?
A.American
people
cannot
understand
him
B.American
people
cannot
understand
him
C.the
grammar
is
too
hard
for
him
D.the
spelling
is
too
hard
for
him
答案:A
解析:推理判断题。由第一段学英语的学生提出的问题可推知,他担心美国人听不懂他的话。
30.What
are
American
English
and
British
English
different
in?
A.Spelling.
B.Pronunciation.
C.Grammar.
D.All
of
the
above.
答案:D
解析:细节考查题。第二段讲述了英国英语和美国英语在拼写、发音、语法等方面的不同,由此可得出答案。
31.What
is
NOT
mentioned
(提及)
in
the
passage?
A.Whether
there
are
differences
between
British
English
and
American
English.
B.Whether
British
English
and
American
English
are
one
language
or
two.
C.How
the
differences
between
British
English
and
American
English
came
about.
D.How
important
the
differences
are.
答案:C
解析:文中没有提到这种差别是怎么产生的。
32.Who
say
“Do
you
have
a
watch?”
A.British
people.
B.American
people.
C.Children.
D.Teachers.
答案:B
解析:推理判断题。由第二段可知,英国人常说“Have
you...?”,而美国人常说“Do
you
have...?”,因此答案为B项。
D
Standard
English
is
the
formal
English
that
you
need
to
use
when
you
write
in
coursework
or
in
the
exam.Standard
English
is
the
form
of
English
you
learn
in
school.All
written
English
should
be
standard
means
that
it
should
be
clear
enough
for
anyone
in
Britain
to
understand
it.Standard
English
developed
as
the
main
form
of
printed
English
in
the
15th
century.At
the
time,every
region
of
Britain
used
to
spell
words
differently,but
printers
needed
a
fixed
spelling.Printers
like
Caxton
chose
the
East
Midlands
dialect
form
which
was
used
in
London
and
the
South
East.Soon
standard
English
replaced
all
written
dialect
forms—the
other
forms
of
English
spoken
around
the
country.It
also
replaced
French
and
Latin
in
law
and
in
academic
(学术的)
works.In
the
18th
century,people
wrote
dictionaries
and
grammar
books
which
standardized
spelling.Dr
Johnson’s
Dictionary
of
1755
fixed
many
of
the
spellings
we
still
use
today.All
written
English
should
be
standard
English—any
grammar
rules
you
learn
are
for
standard
English
and
you
will
definitely
need
to
learn
them
to
avoid
making
mistakes
in
your
work.The
rules
of
standard
English
mean
using
the
correct
forms
of
words
with
the
correct
spellings.
Avoid
slang
words
(俚语)—words
that
your
teachers
or
friends
wouldn’t
understand.You’ll
lose
marks
if
the
examiners
can’t
understand
what
you
say
or
write.Don’t
use
dialect
words.Every
region
has
words
or
phrases
that
are
only
used
there.Don’t
use
them
in
your
coursework,because
you
won’t
be
understood.Make
sure
you
revise
grammar
and
punctuation
(标点)
you
have
learned,and
learn
the
list
of
commonly
misspelled
words
you
have
made.Clichés
are
ideas
or
sayings
which
have
been
used
so
often
that
they’ve
become
boring
and
unoriginal.Phrases
like,“As
good
as
it
gets”
“At
the
end
of
the
day”
“In
the
fullness
of
time”
are
all
clichés.
So
are
images
like,“as
fierce
as
a
lion”
“as
cunning
as
a
fox”.If
you
use
them
you
will
sound
boring
and
unimaginative—that
could
mean
you
lose
marks
for
writing
and
speaking
style.So
avoid
clichés.
33.What
is
standard
English?
A.The
English
spoken
by
British
people.
B.The
English
spoken
by
American
people.
C.The
English
spoken
by
British
people
in
the
15th
Century.
D.The
English
used
in
London.
答案:D
解析:细节理解题。由第一段第四句和第六句可知。
34.What
are
clichés
according
to
the
passage?
A.The
English
full
of
slang
words.
B.The
long
phrases
which
are
used
often.
C.The
boring
ideas
or
sayings
because
of
being
used
often.
D.All
the
English
which
is
used
outside
of
London
and
in
the
southeast
of
Britain.
答案:C
解析:细节理解题。由第二段第七句“Clichés
are
ideas
or
sayings...”可知。
35.Why
do
we
need
to
use
standard
English?
A.Because
no
one
can
understand
dialect
words.
B.Because
local
dialect
belongs
to
a
certain
region,not
everyone
can
understand
it.
C.Because
there
are
many
kinds
of
English
in
the
world,we
need
standard
English
to
make
communication
easier.
D.Because
standard
English
has
been
used
for
a
long
time.
答案:B
解析:细节理解题。由第一段第三句和第二段第四、五句可知。
第二节(共5小题;每小题2分,满分10分)
根据短文内容,从短文后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
Oral
English,also
known
as
spoken
English,is
the
form
of
English
that
is
used
when
people
are
speaking
to
one
another.Students
who
are
learning
English
as
a
second
language
often
feel
uncomfortable
using
oral
English
because
they
fear
that
they
will
not
be
understood.It
is
important
that
a
person
who
is
learning
to
speak
English
practices
using
the
language.　36　?
Listening
is
important
to
learning
spoken
English.　37　
Pay
attention
to
conversations
that
happen
around
you
while
you
are
shopping.Watch
the
news
every
evening
while
you
have
supper.?
Part
of
learning
spoken
English
is
in
understanding
how
English
words
are
formed.Watch
the
mouths
and
tongues
of
native
English
speakers
carefully.　38　Notice
how
the
lips
form
certain
sounds.Imitate
(模仿)
what
you
see.?
Rent
movies
over
the
weekend.Try
to
follow
the
story
line
of
comedy
shows.　39　
Not
having
to
respond
in
English
lets
you
concentrate
on
simply
understanding
what
is
being
said.Understanding
how
English
is
used
in
conversation
will
help
you
to
better
communicate
in
the
language.?
　40　
When
you
are
reading,pay
more
attention
to
the
correct
pronunciation
of
the
words
you
are
reading
rather
than
comprehension
of
each
word.Read
easy
books
that
are
written
for
children.Reading
simple
books
takes
away
the
frustration
of
sounding
out
hard
words.?
A.Read
out
loud
for
twenty
to
thirty
minutes
every
day.
B.Listen
to
English
radio
while
getting
ready
in
the
morning.
C.Observe
how
much
the
mouth
is
opened
to
say
certain
words.
D.Find
a
friend
or
teacher
who
is
willing
to
help
you
learn
English.
E.Repeat
the
conversations
several
times
to
increase
your
speaking
speed.
F.Watching
TV
shows
and
movies
allows
you
to
hear
English
used
in
conversation.
G.The
more
a
person
practices
his
or
her
skills,the
more
easily
speaking
English
will
become.
答案:36~40
GBCFA
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第一节　完形填空(共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
阅读下面短文,从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
People
from
Great
Britain
brought
the
English
language
to
North
America
in
the
16th
and
17th
centuries.And
in
the
　41　
300
years,there
were
　42　
many
changes
in
　43　
places
that
now
people
can　44　
tell
an
English
person
　45　
an
American
in
the
way
he
or
she
talks.?
Many
old
words
　46　
in
England
but
were
kept
in
America.For
example,300
years
ago
people
in
Great
Britain
got
their
water
from
something
they
called
either
a
“faucet”,a
“spigot”,or
a
“tap”.All
these
words
are
　47　
heard
in
different
parts
of
America,but
only
“tap”
is
still
common
in
　48　.Americans
often
made
up
new
words
or
changed
old
　49　.“Corn”
is
one
kind
of
plant
in
America
and
　50　
in
England.?
Also,over
the
last
three
centuries
the
English
language
has
　51　
thousands
of
new
words
for
things
that
weren’t
known
　52　.And
often,American
and
English
people
used
two
　53　
names
for
them.A
tin
can
is
called
“tin”
for
short
in
England,but
a
“can”
in
America.The
word
“radio”
is
　54　
all
over
the
world,including
America.But
many
English
people
call
it
“wireless”.And
almost
anything
having
something
to
do
　55　
cars,railroads,etc.　56　
different
names
in
British
and
American
English.?
But
now
American
and
British
English
may
be
growing
close
together.One
　57　
is
the
large
amount
of
American
speeches
that
British
people
hear
daily
in
movies,on
television,or
　58　
travelers.　59　
this,Americans
seem
to
be
influencing
the
British
more
or
less.So
some
day,English
may
even
be
　60　
on
both
sides
of
the
Atlantic.?
41.A.following　　B.recent　　C.oldest　　D.last
答案:A
解析:在16、17世纪后(following)的三百年里。following
意为“接下来的”;recent意为“最近的”;oldest意为“最古老的”;last意为“上一个,最后的”。
42.A.such
B.too
C.so
D.great
答案:C
解析:so...that...句式。
43.A.either
B.both
C.neither
D.two
答案:B
解析:both指Great
Britain和North
America。
44.A.hardly
B.difficultly
C.clearly
D.easily
答案:D
解析:由于发生了很大变化,人们应该“容易”分别出美国人和英国人。
45.A.with
B.from
C.to
D.and
答案:B
解析:tell...from...是固定短语,意为“把……和……区分开”。
46.A.disappeared
B.happened
C.spoke
D.took
答案:A
解析:从上下文可以得知很多古词汇已经消失。
47.A.not
B.hardly
C.also
D.still
答案:D
解析:此句是对but
were
kept
in
America的进一步说明。
48.A.America
B.the
two
countries
C.England
D.British
答案:C
解析:从but的转折含义可以推断出正确答案。
49.A.word
B.forms
C.ones
D.ways
答案:C
解析:ones指代前面所谈到的words。
50.A.another
B.other
C.others
D.one
答案:A
解析:plant在美语中指的是另一种作物。
51.A.watched
B.added
C.discovered
D.answered
答案:B
解析:英语语言“增加了”成千上万个新词汇。故选added。
52.A.anywhere
B.in
some
countries
C.before
D.for
centuries
答案:C
解析:此处需要一个表示时间的副词。
53.A.new
B.short
C.different
D.surprising
答案:C
解析:从后面的两句可知,此处是指用“不同的”词汇指代同一物体。
54.A.produced
B.made
C.developed
D.used
答案:D
解析:produce意为“生产,产生”;made意为“制作,使”;develop意为“发展”;use意为“使用”。句意:radio这个单词在世界各地被使用。
55.A.to
B.away
C.with
D.from
答案:C
解析:have
something
to
do
with是固定句式,意为“和……有关”。
56.A.has
B.have
C.have
given
D.was
given
答案:A
解析:此句的主语是anything,所以要用单数。
57.A.thing
B.cause
C.belief
D.expression
答案:A
解析:thing意为“情况”;cause意为“原因,事业”;belief意为“信任,信念”;expression意为“表达,表情”。由句意“一件事情是英国人在电影中、电视上……听到的美国人大量的会话数量”。
58.A.from
B.in
C.on
D.to
答案:A
解析:此处表示“从游客那儿所听到的讲话”,所以用from。
59.A.As
B.Because
C.Besides
D.Because
of
答案:D
解析:从后半句可以看出,正是由于上句话中所提到的原因才得出结论:美语似乎也对英语产生了影响。
60.A.different
B.more
different
C.the
same
D.more
useful
答案:C
解析:上文中谈到美语对英语也产生了影响,所以作者最后说“将来有一天大西洋两岸的英语可能会是一样了”。
第Ⅱ卷
第三部分　英语知识运用(共两节,满分45分)
第二节(共10小题;每小题1.5分,满分15分)
阅读下面材料,在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。
English
is
61.　　　　　
language
spoken
all
around
the
world.There
62.　　　　　(be)
more
than
42
countries
where
most
people
speak
English.Most
native
speakers
of
English
are
found
63.　　　　　
the
United
States,the
United
Kingdom,Canada,Australia,South
Africa,Ireland
and
New
Zealand.For
more
than
375
million
people,English
is
64.　　　　　(them)
mother
tongue.An
equal
(同等的)
number
of
people
learn
English
as
a
65.　　　　　　(two)
language.These
people
speak
the
language
of
their
own
country
at
home
with
their
family,66.　　　　　
the
language
that
the
government
(政府)
67.　　　　　(use)
is
English.The
number
68.　　　　　
people
who
learn
English
as
a
foreign
language
is
69.　　　　　(many)
than
750
million.Everywhere
in
the
world,70.　　　　　　　(child)
go
to
school
to
learn
English.?
答案:61.a　62.are　63.in　64.their　65.second　66.but
67.uses　68.of　69.more　70.children
第四部分　写作(共两节,满分35分)
第一节　短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
假定英语课上老师要求同桌之间交换修改作文,请你修改你同桌写的以下作文。文中共有10处语言错误,每句中最多有两处。每处错误仅涉及一个单词的增加、删除或修改。
增加:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),并在其下面写出该加的词。
删除:把多余的词用斜线(\)划掉。
修改:在错的词下画一横线,并在该词下面写出修改后的词。
注意:1.每处错误及其修改均仅限一词;
2.只允许修改10处,多者(从第11处起)不计分。
I
want
to
know
which
is
best
way
to
learn
a
language.I
think
we
should
remember
what
we
all
learned
our
own
language
when
we
were
child
at
school.If
we
learn
a
second
language
by
the
same
way,it
will
not
be
such
difficult
as
we
expect.Think
of
what
small
child
does
every
day.He
listens
to
people
close
to
he
speak
and
tries
to
learn
something.He
is
using
the
language.He
was
talking
with
them
in
it
but
thinking
in
it
all
the
time.So
if
you
want
to
learn
a
language
good,just
work
hard
at
it.
答案:第一句:best前加the
第二句:what→how;child→children
第三句:by→in;such→so
第四句:在small前加a
第五句:he→him
第七句:was→is;but→and
第八句:good→well
第二节　书面表达(满分25分)
请你以学生会的名义为一场英语演讲比赛写一则海报。
比赛时间
9月19日下午3:00~5:00
比赛地点
学校活动中心
报名方式
参加比赛的同学将姓名和演讲话题报给班长
报名截止日期
9月15日
Poster
?
?
?
?
?
?
May
you
succeed!
The
Students’
Union
September
10th
参考范文:
Poster
An
English
speaking
contest
will
be
held
in
our
school
activity
center
from
3:00
pm
to
5:00
pm
on
Sept.19th.Those
who
want
to
take
part
in
the
contest
have
to
sign
up
before
Sept.15th
and
report
your
names
and
the
subjects
of
the
contest
to
your
monitors.
May
you
succeed!?
The
Students’
Union?
September
10th?